JP7189166B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of playing games.

In a pachinko game machine, which is an example of a game machine, a storage unit capable of storing game media supplied from a game island installed in a game hall, a payout device (payout unit) capable of paying out game media, and a guide passage forming portion that forms a guide passage for guiding the game media supplied to the storage portion to the payout portion, and the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion are attached to the game frame by screw members. (See Patent Document 1, for example).

JP-A-2003-96050

In the game machine described in Patent Document 1, the screw member for attaching the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion to the game frame and the screw member attached to the inside of the game island are disengaged, and the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion are disengaged. If the game medium falls into the part, the screw member will be mixed into the payout device together with the game medium. There was a problem that it may be paid out to

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing a screw member from entering a payout portion.

The game machine of means A is
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a starting region;
Light emitting means including a first light emitting means capable of emitting light and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means;
display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
an effect executing means capable of executing a specific display effect of displaying the specific display and a specific light emitting effect of causing the first light emitting means to emit light based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
a storage section capable of storing game media;
a payout unit capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming portion having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding the game media in the storage portion to the payout portion;
a screw drop limiting portion provided to cover the upper side of the guide passage forming portion;
with
A game can be played using the game medium paid out from the payout unit, and the specific light emission effect can be executed based on the game medium entering the start area,
The screw drop-limiting portion prevents the game medium falling on the screw drop-limiting portion from staying and the screw member dropped on the screw drop-limiting portion to drop into the guide passage forming portion. configured to be able to stay on the restriction part,
The second light emitting means emits light in a light emitting mode corresponding to the specific light emitting effect in the first light emitting means during a first period from the start of the specific light emitting effect to a predetermined timing and a second period different from the first period. is capable of emitting light through
A gaming machine characterized by:
The game machine of means 1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
a storage section (eg, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (eg, game ball P);
a payout unit (e.g., payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
A guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) that has an open upper surface and forms a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage) that guides game media in the storage portion to the payout portion. and second guide passage forming portion 204),
a cover part (eg, first cover body 310, second cover body 320, third cover body 330) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part;
with
A predetermined limiting portion (for example, long hole 316A 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed portion 336) are provided (see FIGS. 22 and 24),
A plurality of specific restricting portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) are provided in the guiding passage forming portion for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guiding passage forming portion to the dispensing portion (see FIG. 11). , FIGS. 12 and 27),
The predetermined restricting portion has a first retention portion (eg, long hole 316A) capable of retaining the screw members (eg, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) dropped on the cover portion. ~ 316C) and a second retention portion (eg, grooves 326A to 326C),
The second retention section is provided at a position closer to the dispensing section (for example, dispensing device 200) than the first retention section, and is larger than the first retention section (L22B>L21),
moreover,
Light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying specific displays (for example, pending display and active display) corresponding to variable display;
A specific display effect for displaying the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a portion in which a pending display or an active display is displayed in any one of the display patterns α to γ) ) and a specific light emitting effect (for example, flash effect at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light, effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120)
with
The effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, FIG. 40). -28, Figures 40-29(A) to 40-32(H), Figures 40-49(A) to 40-50(D), from before completion of display of pending indication The part that lights the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning),
The ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-24, when the winning flash effect is executed) In the case of winning, the proportion of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning),
The light emitting means includes first light emitting means (for example, winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) and
The first light emitting means has a first period from the start of the specific light emission effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous winning flash effect). A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. period) in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-28,
The winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the first winning flash effect, and blinks at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 during the second winning flash effect execution period),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, FIGS. 40-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink at the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term, and the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term is executed. During the period, the part blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T0),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. Further, it is possible to prevent the threaded member that has entered the guide passage forming portion from entering the delivery portion. In addition, since the screw member tends to be retained in the retaining portion as it approaches the dispensing portion, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from moving and falling into the guide passage forming portion. Also, the interest in the game is improved.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include an invention relating to a game machine of means 2 below. Conventionally, in a game machine, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (entering the game ball into the starting area), as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-105941, the identification based on the establishment of the predetermined condition The display (suspended display or active display) is displayed on the display means, and for the variable display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, a pre-reading notice is executed that suggests that the variable display will be controlled to an advantageous state before the start of the variable display. In some cases, it is possible to execute a pre-reading notice (specific light-emitting effect) by causing the light-emitting means to emit light. However, in such a gaming machine, depending on the timing at which the specific display is started and the timing at which the specific light emission effect is started, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. In view of this point, there is a demand for providing a gaming machine that allows a player to easily recognize a specific display that is the target of a specific light emission effect.

The game machine of means 2 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
Light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying specific displays (for example, pending display and active display) corresponding to variable display;
A specific display effect for displaying the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a portion in which a pending display or an active display is displayed in any one of the display patterns α to γ) ) and a specific light emitting effect (for example, flash effect at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light, effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120)
with
The effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, FIG. 40). -28, Figures 40-29(A) to 40-32(H), Figures 40-49(A) to 40-50(D), from before completion of display of pending indication The part that lights the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning),
The ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-24, when the winning flash effect is executed) In the case of winning, the proportion of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning),
The light emitting means includes first light emitting means (for example, winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) and
The first light emitting means has a first period from the start of the specific light emission effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous winning flash effect). A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. period) in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has the brightness C1 and A part that flashes at cycle T1 and flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the late winning),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, FIGS. 40-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink at the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term, and the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term is executed. During the period, the part blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T0),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the first period of the specific light emission effect. , not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means can emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, so that the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous. This makes it even easier for the player to recognize the specified display.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention together with the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It may have.

It is a front view showing a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pachinko game machine. It is a rear view showing a pachinko game machine. It is a left side view showing the pachinko game machine. FIG. 4 is a plan view showing a frame for a game machine to which a game board is attached; It is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko game machine is seen from diagonally behind. It is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is removed from the game machine frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting structure of the passage forming body to the game machine frame; It is an enlarged rear view showing the rear upper part of the frame for gaming machines. (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 10A, (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 10A, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 10A. (A) is a plan view showing a first guide passage forming portion, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is an EE cross-sectional view of (A), and (C) is an FF cross-sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the second cover body, (B) is a GG sectional view of (A), and (C) is a HH sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the third cover body, (B) is a cross-sectional view along II of (A), (C) is a cross-sectional view along JJ of (A), and (D) is a third cover body. and (E) is a perspective view showing a ball stopper member. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the first guide passage forming portion showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the first state, and (B) is a first guide passage forming portion showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the second state. It is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the. (A) is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame to which a terminal board is mounted, (B) is a KK section of (A), and (C) is a LL section of (B). It is the perspective view which shows the state which looked at the circumference|surroundings of the ball|bowl tank part in the back surface of the game frame from diagonally behind. (A) is a plan view showing the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back of the game frame, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM of (A). It is the perspective view which shows the state which looked at the periphery of the 1st guide passage formation part in the back surface of a game frame from diagonally behind. It is a top view which shows the periphery of the 1st guide passage formation part in the back surface of a game frame. 21. (A) is a sectional view taken along line NN of FIG. 21, (B) is a view showing a rotating state of the screw member, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line OO of FIG. (A) is a cross-sectional view along PP in FIG. 21, and (B) is a cross-sectional view along QQ in FIG. FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view taken along line RR of FIG. 21; FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view taken along line SS of FIG. 21; (A) is the retention state of the screw member when the ball stopper is in the first state, (B) is a TT sectional view of (A), and (C) is the ball stopper when the ball stopper is in the second state. FIG. 10D is a UU cross-sectional view of FIG. 1C, showing a retained state of the screw member; It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the 1st guide passage formation part which shows the movement condition of a screw member. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide path forming portion showing the movement state of the game ball on the cover portion. (A) is a schematic rear view showing a cover portion as a modification, and (B) is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired so as to cross the cover portion. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the gaming machine in the characteristic part 053SG. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the state by which the input circuit and the output circuit were mounted in the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data bus formed in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern branched from the data bus in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground area|region formed in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground area|region formed in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a circuit diagram showing a connection mode of low-voltage components and high-voltage components mounted on the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the connector mounted in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a diagram showing a wiring pattern around the connector formed on the solder surface of the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state where the game control board in Example 1 was accommodated in the board case. It is a circuit diagram related to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern for the power supply formed in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the wiring pattern formed in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1, and the wiring pattern for power supply formed in the soldering surface. It is a figure which shows an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 was attached to the game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 was attached to the game machine. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in connection with the connection of the microcomputer for game control, an input circuit, and an output circuit in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in connection with the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2 in connection with the microcomputer for game control, an input circuit, and an output circuit. It is a circuit diagram related to the connection between the game control microcomputer and the input circuit and the output circuit in the game control board in the second embodiment. It is a perspective view showing the structure of the specific electronic component mounted on the game control board in Example 3, (A) is a perspective view from above the specific electronic component, (B) is a lower side of the specific electronic component 1 is a perspective view from . It is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which a specific electronic component is soldered to the game control board in Example 3. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. 1 is a front view of an image display device; FIG. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a performance control data holding area, (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning, and (C) is a configuration of an active display buffer. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example; It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of winning random number determination processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing; It is a part of the flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing whether or not to execute a pending display forewarning effect as a foreseeing forewarning and a determination ratio of a display pattern; It is a part of the flowchart which shows an example of specific display display start effect execution processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a rendering mode of a specific display display start rendering A; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a rendering mode of a specific display display start rendering B; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a winning flash effect execution process; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a winning flash effect execution process; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the flash production|presentation at the time of an early winning a prize, and the flash production|presentation at the time of a late winning a prize. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of flash production|presentation at the time of winning. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; (A) is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine with the game effect lamp lit at high brightness (C1), and (B) is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine with the game effect lamp off. be. A front view of a pachinko game machine in which the game effect lamp is lit with low luminance (C2), and a pachinko machine showing the transition of the light emission mode of the game effect lamp in the state in which the game effect lamp is lit with low luminance. It is a front view of. The timing of the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the lighting of the flash lamp at the time of winning, the game effect lamp, and the starter lamp, and the display of the effect image and the silhouette image. It is a timing chart showing. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. In the modified example, when a prize-winning flash effect occurs, output of a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, lighting of the flash lamp at the time of winning, the game effect lamp, and the starter lamp, and the display of the effect image and the silhouette image is a timing chart showing the timing of FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing timings of lighting of a win-time flash lamp, a game effect lamp, and a starter lamp, display of an effect image and a silhouette image, and operation of a movable body in a modified example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing timings of display of a winning flash lamp and a silhouette image in a modified example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing operation timings of a win-time flash lamp and a movable body in a modified example, and a diagram showing determination ratios of timings at which light-emitting modes of the win-time flash lamp change. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing display modes of pending display/active display, suggestive content of each display mode, and selection ratio when execution of winning slash effect is determined in a modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a mode of effect in the pending display and the active display when the winning flash effect is executed in the modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a mode of effect in the pending display and the active display when the winning flash effect is executed in the modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a mode of effect in the pending display and the active display when the winning flash effect is executed in the modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(form)
The game machine of form 1 is
a storage section (eg, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (eg, game ball P);
a payout unit (for example, payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
A guide passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage forming portion 202) that has an open top surface and forms a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage) that guides game media in the storage portion to the payout portion. and second guide passage forming portion 204),
It is characterized by having

The gaming machine of form 2 is the gaming machine according to form 1,
A cover portion (for example, the cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320, the cover portion of the third cover body 330) provided to partially cover the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion 334),
The cover restricts screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16) dropped on the cover from falling to the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202). Predetermined restricting portions (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, and recesses 336) are provided (see FIGS. 22 and 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 3 is the gaming machine according to form 2,
The predetermined restricting portions (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) are provided so that game media that have fallen on the cover portion can fall from the cover portion without staying there. It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the game medium does not stay in the predetermined restricting portion and the screw member can always be kept in a state of being able to stay, the screw member dropped onto the cover portion falls into the guide passage forming portion. can be prevented.

The gaming machine of form 4 is the gaming machine according to form 2 or 3,
The predetermined restricting portion has a first retention portion (eg, long hole 316A) capable of retaining the screw members (eg, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) dropped on the cover portion. ~ 316C) and a second retention portion (eg, grooves 326A to 326C),
The second retention section is provided at a position closer to the dispensing section (for example, dispensing device 200) than the first retention section, and is larger than the first retention section (L22B>L21).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member is more likely to be retained in the retaining portion as the dispensing portion is approached, so that it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from moving and falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 4,
The dispensing portion (eg, dispensing device) of the screw members (eg, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) dropped into the guiding passage forming portion (eg, the first guiding passage forming portion 202) 200) are provided with a plurality of specific restriction portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) (see FIGS. 12 and 27).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has entered the guide passage forming portion from entering the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 6 is the gaming machine according to form 5,
The specific restriction portion is a plurality of holes (for example, holes 271A to 271H),
At least two or more of the plurality of holes have a size that allows the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion to drop outside the guide passage forming portion before reaching the dispensing portion. have (L11>L2, see FIG. 11)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if a screw member is mixed in the guide passage forming portion, it can be dropped out of the guide passage forming portion from the hole, so that the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion will not be mixed in the delivery portion. can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering the guide passage forming portion from obstructing the flow of the game medium.

The gaming machine of form 7 is the gaming machine according to form 6,
The plurality of holes have different sizes,
A predetermined hole that is the largest among the plurality of holes is provided at a position closest to the dispensing portion (for example, the lateral dimension L12 of the hole 271H is larger than the lateral dimension of the other holes 271A to 271G. See Figure 12)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member can be suitably dropped from the predetermined hole to the outside of the guide passage forming portion, so that the screw member dropped into the guide passage forming portion can be prevented from being mixed into the dispensing portion. .

The gaming machine of form 8 is the gaming machine according to form 6 or 7,
The cover portion (for example, the cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320, the third cover body 330, and There is an uncovered area (e.g., uncovered area 350) that is not covered by the cover portion 334 of
At least some of the plurality of specific restricting portions (for example, holes 271B to 271H) are provided at positions corresponding to the uncovered regions in the guide passage forming portion (see FIG. 27).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the screw member enters the guide passage-forming portion from the uncovered region, it can be dropped out of the guide passage-forming portion through the hole.

The gaming machine of form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 8,
A game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, a ball tank forming portion 201),
The reservoir is
Arranged on the upper surface side of a predetermined portion (for example, the first projecting portion 224) of the game frame,
It is close to or in contact with the upper surface of the predetermined portion so that the screw member does not enter between it and the upper surface of the predetermined portion (L30<L1, see FIG. 19B).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering between the predetermined portion of the game frame and the storage portion and damaging the member.

The gaming machine of form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 9,
A first board (e.g., main board 11, effect control board 12, etc.) attached to a lower position than the guide passage forming portion (e.g., first guide passage forming portion 202);
a second substrate (for example, a terminal substrate 210) attached at a position above the guide passage forming portion;
with
The first board is mounted by a mounting method using screw members, while the second board is mounted by a mounting method different from the mounting method using screw members (for example, the board cases 11A and 12A are mounted using screw members). The terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by using locking means consisting of a plurality of restricting portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from the screw member. See Figure 17)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 11 is the gaming machine according to form 10,
The second board is an external output board (e.g., terminal board 210) to which a wiring (e.g., cable C) for outputting a predetermined signal to the outside of the gaming machine is connected,
The first substrate has a smaller number of wirings to be connected than the external output substrate (for example, the plurality of connection holes 231 of the terminal substrate 210 as the first substrate provided above the first guide path forming portion 202). While the number of cables C that can be connected to is set to the first number (for example, 20), the second Each signal line is also connected to the substrate, but the second number (for example, 10) is smaller than the first number.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the second board, which has a large number of wires to be connected and is likely to be subjected to an external force during the wiring connection work, cannot be attached with a screw member. It is possible to prevent falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 12 is the gaming machine according to form 10 or 11,
a game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, the ball tank forming portion 201);
a mounting frame (for example, a board mounting frame 211) for mounting the external output board to the game frame;
with
The mounting frame is characterized by having a mounting frame restricting portion (for example, recessed portion 242) for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen onto the mounting frame to the guide passage forming portion.
According to this feature, the mounting frame of the external output board can be utilized to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the dispensing portion.

The gaming machine of form 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 12,
The guide passages of the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have moved toward the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) around the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) Special restricting portions (for example, recessed portions 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) are provided to restrict dropping into the forming portion (Fig. 22(C), Figs. 23(A), (B), Fig. 24 reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 14 is the gaming machine according to form 13,
The special restricting portion moves the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have moved toward the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) to the guide passage forming portion. A special retention portion (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) that can be retained before reaching, and is provided below the screw member attached to the attached portion,
A threaded member that has been detached from the attached portion but has not been retained in the special retaining portion can move toward the cover portion (see FIGS. 22(C), 23(A), (B), and 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member detached from the attached portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 15 is the gaming machine according to form 13 or 14,
the special retention portion is a recess (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) capable of accommodating at least a portion of the screw member;
The depth of the recess is the depth to which a portion of the screw member protrudes when the screw member is accommodated (see FIGS. 22(C), 23(A), (B), and 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member retained in the recess can be easily taken out.

The gaming machine of form 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 15,
A cover portion (for example, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202),
The cover portion is provided so as to incline downward toward the dispensing portion side,
A specific portion (for example, a ball stop member 340) capable of retaining a screw member that has fallen onto the cover portion is provided on the payout portion side of the cover portion in the inclined direction (see FIG. 15, Figures 26 and 27)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 17 is the gaming machine according to form 16,
The specific part (for example, the ball stopping member 340) has a first state in which the game medium (for example, the game ball P) of the guide path forming part (for example, the first guide path forming part 202) can flow down; It can be changed to a second state in which the game medium in the guide passage forming portion is difficult to flow down or cannot flow down (for example, the rotating portion 341 is positioned at the standing position and the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344). A first state in which the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 can flow down to the second guide passage forming portion 204, and the rotating portion 341 is positioned at the tilted position, and the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344. It is possible to change to a second state in which it is possible to contact the game ball and the game ball in the first guide path forming part 202 cannot flow down to the second guide path forming part 204 (or difficult to flow down).) ,
When the specific portion is in the second state, the screw member tends to stay more easily than when it is in the first state (see FIG. 26).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 18 is the gaming machine according to form 16 or 17,
The cover part
A first cover portion (for example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) provided with a retention portion (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) that allows screw members dropped onto the cover portion to be retained on the cover portion ( For example, the cover portion 324 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320),
a second cover portion (for example, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) provided with the specific portion different from the first cover portion;
It is characterized by including
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 19 is the gaming machine according to form 18,
The second cover portion (for example, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) is attached by a screw member (for example, a screw member N16) having a locking portion (for example, a flange portion F) (see FIG. 8 reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 19,
A game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, a ball tank forming portion 201),
The storage portion is attached to the game frame at a plurality of locations by screw members (for example, screw members N11 to N14) having locking portions,
A screw member for attaching the storage portion and the guiding passage forming portion (for example, the first guiding passage forming portion 202) to the game frame is designed to fall outside the guiding passage forming portion even if the screw member is disengaged from the game frame. Installed (see Figure 8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member that attaches the storage portion is made difficult to come off from the game frame, and the screw member that attaches the storage portion and the guide passage formation portion falls outside the guide passage formation portion even if it comes off. It is possible to prevent the threaded member that has fallen into the passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 21 is the gaming machine according to form 20,
A plurality of screw members for attaching the storage portion (for example, the ball tank forming portion 201) and the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) to the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) Of these, a predetermined screw member (for example, screw member N12) near the periphery of the game machine is also used as a screw member for attaching a ground wire (for example, ground wire 226) (see FIG. 8).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the number of screw members can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the screw members that have fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 22 is the gaming machine according to form 20 or 21,
The screw members (for example, screw members N11 to N14) for attaching the storage portion (for example, the ball tank forming portion 201) to the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) are provided to reinforce the game frame. Attached to a metal member (for example, a metal plate 222) (see FIG. 8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the reservoir can be firmly attached.

The gaming machine of form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 20 to 22,
Screw members (for example, screw members N3 to N6) attached to positions above the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) in the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) are It is a screw member different from the screw member having the locking portion.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 24 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 20 to 23,
A game board (e.g., game board 2) detachable from the game frame (e.g., game machine frame 3) is provided,
In the area below the guiding passage forming portion (for example, the first guiding passage forming portion 202) in the game board, there is an inclined surface (for example, the upper portion of the cover body 220) that allows the falling screw member to flow down. wall portion 220H) is provided (see FIGS. 18 to 20 and FIG. 27)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has dropped from the guide passage forming portion onto the game board to bounce and be mixed into the guide passage forming portion again.

The gaming machine of form 25 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 24,
A cover portion (for example, the cover portion 360 of Modification 1) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202),
The guide passage forming portion is
a first passage forming portion (e.g., first guide passage forming portion 202) extending downward toward one side (e.g., left side);
a second passage forming portion (for example, a second guiding passage forming portion 204) extending downward from the lower end of the first passage forming portion;
has
The cover portion is provided along the first passage forming portion so that the screw member dropped onto the cover portion moves and falls outside the guiding passage forming portion from the lower end (Fig. 29 ( A) See)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 26 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2 to 25,
A wiring (for example, a cable CH) is provided so as to cross the guide passage forming portion at a position near the predetermined restriction portion (for example, the concave portion 361) in the cover portion (for example, the cover portion 360 of Modification 1). (see FIG. 29(B))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member is likely to get caught on the wiring and remain in the predetermined restricting portion.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
First, the configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described. In the following description, the direction in which the player is positioned is defined as the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the opposite direction is defined as the rear. Also, the description will be made with reference to the up, down, left, and right directions when viewed from a player positioned in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area Y is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot and struck in the game area Y from a predetermined ball shooting device. In addition, a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a is provided in the game machine frame 3 so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the game area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, or methacrylic resin, and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. (not shown), a guide rail 2b, etc., and a spacer member integrally attached to the back side of the board. The game board 2 is made of a non-translucent member such as a plywood board and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. may be configured

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the bottom left of the game area Y), special symbols (also called special symbols) as special identification information of a plurality of types are variably displayed (also called a special symbol game). A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Incidentally, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation includes a mode of blinking a certain symbol. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area Y on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 . A frame-shaped center decorative frame 51 is provided in the opening 2c of the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the special game and the variable display of the decoration pattern which are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the bottom left of the game area), a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the first reservation display 25A displays the first reservation storage number according to the number of lit LEDs, and the second reservation display 25B displays the second reservation storage number according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). For example, the variable winning ball device 6B includes a starting winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the starting winning opening door is in the closed position, thereby opening the second starting winning opening. It will be in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (it is also said that the second start winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, in the variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the starting winning opening door is in the open position, so that the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening (the second It is also said that the starting prize opening is in an open state.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be one that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. Also, when a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including general winning holes is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the bottom left of the game area Y). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area Y, there is provided an out port (not shown) into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the peripheral portion of the game area Y. It is The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like in order to shoot a game ball toward the game area Y by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area Y, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held so as to be supplied to the ball launching device ( A batted ball supply plate (upper plate) for storage is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a payout port through which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full. A hitting ball supply tray (lower tray) may be provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area Y, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area Y, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area Y by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during execution of the special game or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start winning has occurred) If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

Incidentally, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot type of jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes "small hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some big-hit types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as payout control board 37 (see FIG. 3), information terminal board, launch control board, power supply board 91 (see FIG. 3), etc. are arranged on the back of pachinko game machine 1. there is

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

In addition, the CPU 103 determines whether or not there is a first start prize or a second start prize, and if there is a prize, a random value for special figure display result determination, jackpot type determination, variation pattern determination, etc. , respectively, and stored (stored) at the top of the empty entry in the first special figure reservation storage section and the second special figure reservation storage section.

Further, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to start the special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit and the second special figure reservation storage unit, and the special figure display result Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for judgment, whether or not the fluctuation display result of the special pattern and the production pattern is a "jackpot" is determined (predetermined) before the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed. Symbol normal processing is executed. In other words, when starting the variable display of the special game, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to derive and display the big win display result as the display result of the variable display based on the random number value stored when the start winning is generated. Execute the process of determining (lottery).

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Back structure of pachinko machine)
Next, the rear structure of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 to 7. FIG. FIG. 3 is a rear view showing the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 4 is a left side view showing the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 5 is a plan view showing a game machine frame to which a game board is attached. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko gaming machine is seen obliquely from behind. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is removed from the game machine frame. 5 to 7, illustration of the glass door frame 50 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 7, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a game board 2, a game machine frame 3 to which the game board 2 is detachably provided, and a left side of the game machine frame 3. A game hall having a glass door frame 50 provided so as to be able to open and close the front surface of the machine frame 3, and a square frame-shaped outer frame 60 supporting the game machine frame 3 so as to be openable and closable about the left side thereof. By fixing the outer frame 60 to a game island (not shown) installed in the game island, it can be installed on the game island.

At the upper back of the game machine frame 3, a replenishment device 150 (FIGS. 3 and 4) is provided from a circulation path of game balls (hereinafter also referred to as game balls P) provided inside game islands (not shown). ), forming a ball tank forming portion 201 that forms a storage portion capable of storing game balls supplied through the ball tank forming portion 201, and forming a first guide passage that guides the game balls stored in the ball tank forming portion 201 toward the left side. A first guide passage forming portion 202 and a first passage forming body 203 extending in the left-right direction along the upper side portion 3A of the frame 3 for a game machine. A terminal substrate 210, which will be described later, is provided above the first guide path forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

The replenishing device 150 has a guiding member 150A composed of a nozzle or the like capable of guiding the game balls on the circulation route of the game island, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls guided by the guiding member 150A. a sprocket (not shown) capable of driving the sprocket, a drive source (not shown) for driving the sprocket, and the game machine frame 3 when the opening of the outer frame 60 is closed by the game machine frame 3. When the lever switch (not shown) is pressed by the game machine frame 3 in the closed state, the game balls sent out by the sprocket enter the ball tank forming portion 201. When the lever switch (not shown) is not pressed by the game machine frame 3 in the open state, the game ball delivered by the sprocket is held so as not to fall. When the number of game balls stored in the ball tank forming part 201 decreases while the outer frame 60 is in the closed state, the drive source rotates the sprocket and the game balls are sent out by a predetermined number to the ball tank forming part 201. It is designed to be supplied to In the replenishment device 150, a case body 150B is constructed by assembling a plurality of members with a plurality of screw members (not shown). It is fixed at a predetermined location.

In addition, a second guide path forming portion 204 that forms a second guide path that guides the game ball guided to the left side by the first guide path forming portion 202 downward, and a game guided by the second guide path forming portion 204 A payout device 200 constituting a payout section capable of putting out balls, and a payout passage for guiding the game balls paid out by the payout device 200 to the upper tray, that is, forming a payout passage for paying out the game balls to the player. Pachinko game for discharging the game balls guided by the payout passage forming part 205 and the second guiding passage forming part 204 to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 without paying out from the payout device 200 to the payout passage forming part 205 A second passage forming body 207 comprising a ball removing passage forming portion 206 that forms a ball removing passage leading to a discharge portion (not shown) provided on the lower back side of the machine 1 is provided in the gaming machine frame 3. It extends vertically along the left side of the back surface of the .

The payout device 200 is composed of a case body formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and has therein a sprocket for paying out a predetermined number of game balls (for example, one ball) at a time, a payout motor for rotating the sprocket, and a game ball. A switching valve capable of switching the passage of the balls between the paying-out passage and the ball-removing passage, an operation lever for switching the switching valve, and the like are provided. Further, a board case 91A in which the power board 91 is housed, a board case 37A in which the payout control board 37 is housed, and the like are provided at the lower back of the gaming machine frame 3 .

In this embodiment, a ball break switch (not shown) capable of detecting a game ball is provided at a predetermined position of the second guide path, and the CPU 103 receives a detection signal from the ball break switch (not shown). Based on the input state, it is constantly monitored whether or not there are game balls to be paid out in the second guide passage on the upstream side of the payout device 200.例文帳に追加When the off state of the ball-out switch (not shown) continues for a predetermined time or longer, it is determined that game balls are not supplied to the payout device 200 for some reason such as ball clogging, that is, a replenishment error has occurred, and payout is performed. The payout operation by the device 200 is stopped. In addition, a predetermined display (not shown) connected to the main board 11 displays a replenishment error, and by outputting a replenishment error command to the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 displays the glass door frame 50. A game effect lamp 9 provided at a predetermined place on the front face is illuminated in an error mode, so that notification processing to the effect that a replenishment error has occurred can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 2 is detachably arranged from the front side of the gaming machine frame 3 in an opening 221 formed substantially in the central portion of the gaming machine frame 3 . The game board 2 includes a plate-like body 2a made up of the above-described board plate and spacer members, various game parts (for example, obstacle nails, winning devices, etc.) provided on the front side of the plate-like body 2a, and the plate-like body 2a. Electronic components such as an image display device 5 provided on the back side, a production device having a movable body 32, a board case 12A in which the production control board 12 is stored, a board case 11A in which the main board 11 is stored, and a plate-shaped It is a structure including a cover body 220 that protects a part, a production device, electronic parts, and the like.

The substrate cases 11A, 12A, 91A, and 37A are configured so that each substrate can be housed therein by a base member and a cover member made of a transparent synthetic resin material. , are attached to the game machine frame 3 or the game board 2 by one or more screw members N20, N21 (see FIG. 3), respectively, and the board cases 91A, 37A are attached to the game machine frame 3 by locking means (not shown). Or it is attached to the game board 2 . The cover body 220 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin material in the shape of a box with an open front surface. part can be opened and closed.

As shown in FIGS. 4 to 6, a first passage formation body 203 and a second passage formation body 207 provided on the back surface of the game machine frame 3, and a cover body 220 constituting the back surface of the game board 2 are It protrudes rearward from the outer frame 60 when the outer frame 60 is closed by the machine frame 3 . In particular, the first passage forming body 203 is provided so that the upper surface opening of the ball tank forming portion 201 is arranged behind the upper plate of the outer frame 60 on the upper back surface of the frame 3 for a game machine, so that the pachinko machine can be used for pachinko games. In a state in which the outer frame 60 of the game machine 1 is fixed to a game island (not shown), game balls can be supplied to the ball tank forming section 201 through the supply device 150 from the circulation path above the game island. .

(Mounting Structure of First Passage Forming Body 203)
Next, the mounting structure of the first passage forming body 203 to the game machine frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view showing the attachment structure of the passage forming body to the game machine frame. FIG. 9 is an enlarged rear view showing the upper rear portion of the gaming machine frame.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the game machine frame 3 is a substantially rectangular frame when viewed from the front, and is provided with an opening 221 for mounting the game board 2 thereon. A reinforcing metal plate 222 is provided in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the upper side portion 3A. A mounting member 223 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the game machine frame 3 is mounted on the back surface of the metal plate 222 .

The mounting member 223 is formed of a synthetic resin material so as to be able to cover the metal plate 222 from the back side. It is attached to the metal plate 222 by screwing each into a plurality of formed screw holes. On the right side of the mounting member 223, a plate-shaped first projecting portion 224 protrudes rearward, and on the left side of the mounting member 223, an upper wall portion 225A, a rear wall portion 225B, and left and right side wall portions 225C. A three-dimensional second projecting portion 225 projects rearward.

The first projecting portion 224 projects rearward from a lower position than the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225, and the sphere tank forming portion 201 is arranged on the upper side thereof. In addition, the first guide path forming portion 202 is arranged on the rear side of the rear wall portion 225B of the second projecting portion 225, and the board mounting frame 211 for mounting the terminal board 210 is mounted on the upper side thereof. ing. The substrate mounting frame 211 is mounted from the rear side to the mounting hole H6 formed in the upper portion while the locking piece 212 projecting downward from the lower side is inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. It is attached to the mounting member 223 by screwing the threaded member N6 into a threaded hole formed in the mounting member 223 .

Thus, the mounting member 223 is formed to cover the upper side of the game board 2 by having the first projecting portion 224 and the second projecting portion 225 projecting backward. Therefore, game balls supplied to the ball tank forming portion 201 from above the game islands are prevented from entering the game board 2 . That is, the mounting member 223 functions as a protective cover for the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

The first passage forming body 203 includes a plurality of screw members N11 to N14 attached to the plurality of mounting holes H11 to H14 from the rear side and a screw member N15 attached to the mounting hole H15 from the upper side. They are attached to the attachment member 223 by screwing into the screw holes. The screw member N12 attached to the mounting hole H12 also serves as a screw member for attaching the ground wire 226 for removing the electricity charged in the first passage forming member 203 to the first passage forming member 203. A first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, and a third cover body 330, which will be described later, are attached to the upper portion of the first passage forming body 203. As shown in FIG. The third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by screwing a screw member N16 attached to the mounting hole H16 from above into a screw hole formed in the rear wall of the first passage forming body 203. there is

As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 8, the threaded members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 include a male threaded portion NS and a head portion NH. It is a flanged screw in which a flange part F as a locking part is integrally formed on the bearing surface of the screw, and by increasing the contact area of the bearing surface and increasing the frictional force, it is difficult to loosen compared to the screw members N3 to N6. It is considered as a screw member.

For example, the diameter L1 of the male screw portion NS of each screw member N1 to N6, N11 to N16 is approximately 1 to 3 mm, the diameter L2 of the head NH is approximately 4 to 7 mm, and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F is approximately 4 to 7 mm. 8 to 10 mm longer than the diameter L2.

The sizes and types of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 are arbitrary, and the dimensions of the diameters L1 to L3 are not limited to those described above. The screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16, which are flanged screws, are screw members integrally formed with a flange portion F (washer). may be attached to the screw member, and the flange portion F and the washer constitute the locking portion of the present invention. Further, the screw member includes a member such as a screw or a bolt that separates from the attached portion when loosened. In addition, the locking portion includes a locking portion for the head NH formed unevenly on the back surface of the head NH and the flange portion F (washer), an adhesive, and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the first passage formation body 203 needs to receive and store the game balls supplied from above the game island in the ball tank formation portion 201, and the first guide passage It is formed in a concave shape with an open upper surface so that clogging of balls is unlikely to occur in the case of clogging of balls, and clogging of balls can be easily eliminated in the event that clogging occurs.

In addition, a first cover body 310 and a second cover body 320 cover the upper surface of the portion where the game balls accumulated in the ball tank forming portion 201 in the vertical direction flow into the first guide passage forming portion 202. In addition, the third cover body 330 is arranged so as to cover the upper surface of the portion where the ball flows from the first guide path forming portion 202 to the second guide path forming portion 204, so that the game ball is rectified. However, although a part of the top opening of the first passage forming body 203 is covered with the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320 and the third cover body 330, the sphere tank forming part 201 and the uncovered area 350 ( 27) is open.

On the other hand, in the vicinity of the periphery of the first passage forming body 203, a plurality of screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the gaming machine frame 3 and the attachment member 223 are arranged. In addition, above the pachinko machine 1 fixed to the game island, screw members (not shown) for assembling the building blocks constituting the game island, and various devices (for example, A large number of screw members (not shown) for attaching the replenishing device 150, etc., to the frame or the like, and a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case bodies of various devices are arranged.

If these screw members are loosened and fall off due to vibration or shock generated in the game island or the pachinko game machine 1, they will roll due to the vibration or shock or the opening and closing of the game machine frame 3, and the ball tank forming part 201 or the first screw member will roll. There is a possibility that they fall inside from the non-covered area 350 of the guide passage forming part 202 and mix into the guide passage of the game ball. In particular, the replenishment device 150 and the like are arranged in the vicinity directly above the ball tank forming section 201 as shown in FIGS. , or when the game machine frame 3 is opened or closed, the replenishment device 150 is likely to vibrate, so a screw member ( (not shown), or when a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case body 150B of the replenishment device 150 are loosened due to vibration and fall off, the inside of the sphere tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202 very likely to fall.

Then, when the screw member drops into the ball tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202, it may move toward the payout device 200 side as the game ball flows down, and finally enter the payout device 200. When the screw member enters the payout device 200 in this way, the sprocket or the switching valve may be damaged by the screw member, or the payout motor may be damaged due to the load caused by the ball clogging, or the screw member may be damaged by the player along with the game ball. There is a risk that the player will be paid out immediately, giving the player a sense of discomfort or distrust.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described below, the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 mixes with the dispensing device 200 and damages or breaks down the dispensing device 200, or the screw member is broken together with the game ball. Various measures have been taken to suppress the payout to the player.

(First passage forming body 203)
Next, the first passage forming body 203 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. 10, (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. 11, (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 10A, (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 10A, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 10A. It is a diagram. 12, (A) is a plan view showing the first guide passage forming portion, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD of (A). 13, (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line EE of (A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along line FF of (A). 14, (A) is a plan view showing the second cover body, (B) is a GG sectional view of (A), and (C) is a HH sectional view of (A). 15, (A) is a plan view showing the third cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line II in (A), (C) is a sectional view taken along line JJ in (A), and (D) is a third cover member. 3 is a perspective view showing a cover body, and (E) is a perspective view showing a ball stopper member. 16, (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the first guide passage forming portion showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the first state, and (B) is a first guide passage showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the second state. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows a guidance passage formation part.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the first passage forming body 203 is made of a conductive synthetic resin material, and has a bottom wall portion 203A and a vertical wall portion 203B erected on the periphery of the bottom wall portion 203A. is formed in a concave shape or a concave groove shape with an opening, and has a ball tank forming portion 201 arranged on the right side and a first guiding passage forming portion 202 arranged on the left side. The sphere tank forming portion 201 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a plan view, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is formed by an upstream portion extending obliquely rearward from the left side of the sphere tank forming portion 201 and a downstream portion extending in the left-right direction. Become. The longitudinal dimension of the ball tank forming portion 201 is longer than the longitudinal dimension of the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that more game balls than the first guide passage forming portion 202 can be stored. It is Further, since the bottom wall portion 203A is formed so as to gradually incline downward from the left side of the sphere tank forming portion 201 toward the right side of the first guide passage forming portion 202, The game ball naturally flows down toward the ball tank formation part 201 and the first guide passage formation part 202 to the left.

A mounting piece 261 facing in the vertical direction is projected from the outer surface of the right standing wall portion 203B of the ball tank forming portion 201, and mounting holes H11 and H12 facing in the front-rear direction are formed in the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 261. . A mounting piece 265 projects from the rear side of the mounting piece 261, and the mounting piece 265 is formed with a mounting hole H15 facing in the vertical direction. A mounting piece 262 facing in the vertical direction is projected from the outer surface of the left standing wall portion 203B of the first guiding passage forming portion 202, and a mounting hole H14 facing in the front-rear direction is formed in the mounting piece 262. A horizontal wall portion 264 protrudes forward from the outer surface of the front vertical wall portion 203B in the upstream portion of the first guiding passage forming portion 202 . A mounting piece 263 is erected on the front side of the horizontal wall portion 264, and the mounting piece 263 is formed with a mounting hole H13 facing in the front-rear direction.

The first passage forming body 203 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 by screwing a plurality of screw members N11 to N15 attached to the attachment holes H11 to H15 into screw holes formed in the attachment member 223. As shown in FIG. A concave portion 280 having a substantially square shape in a plan view is formed on the upper surface of the horizontal wall portion 264 at a position near the rear of the mounting piece 263 .

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, hole portions 270A and 270B are formed at the corners of the bottom wall portion 203A in the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the rear vertical wall portion 203B ( See FIG. 11(A)). A plurality of holes 271A to 271H are formed downstream of the holes 271A and 271B at approximately the central position in the front-rear direction of the bottom wall 203A on the downstream side (left side) of the holes 271A and 271B. In addition, a communication hole 272 is formed through the bottom wall portion 203A at the downstream end portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to drop the game ball into the second guide passage forming portion 204 below. .

A meandering portion 273 is formed in the middle of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and causes the game ball to meander in the front-rear direction and flow down toward the left side. is formed at a position corresponding to the meandering portion 273 . By providing such a meandering portion 273, the ball pressure due to the succeeding ball is prevented from increasing.

In addition, the distance L10 between the front and rear vertical wall portions 203B and 203B lower portions of the first guide passage forming portion 202 is longer than the diameter 2R (about 11 mm) of the game ball and twice the diameter 2R (about 22 mm). (11 mm<L10<22 mm). That is, the first guide path forming portion 202 is formed so as to be able to guide the game balls in one row toward the downstream side.

Since the longitudinal dimension L11 of the holes 271A to 271H excluding the holes 271A and 271B is slightly longer than the diameter L2 of the heads NH of the screw members N3 to N6 (L11>L2), as will be described later, the screw members N3 to Even if N6 enters the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw members N3 to N6 can drop from the holes 271A to 271H. In addition, since the hole 271H formed on the most downstream side has the longest lateral dimension L12 (dimension in the downstream direction of the game ball) compared to the other holes 271A to 271G, the screw members N3 to N6 are connected to the communication hole 272. can be reliably dropped outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 before reaching the .

In other words, these holes 271A to 271H constitute specific restricting portions for restricting movement of the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen into the first guiding passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200. As shown in FIG. It should be noted that dirt and dust other than the threaded member, or any other member can fall from these plurality of holes 271A to 271H.

(First cover body 310)
As shown in FIGS. 13A to 13C, the first cover body 310 extends along the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B on the front side of the ball tank forming portion 201, and the upper end of the standing wall portion 203B extends. A mounting portion 311 having a downward U-shape in cross section that can be fitted from above, a vertical wall portion 312 extending from the right side of the mounting portion 311 toward the rear side, and a right side from the lower portion of the vertical wall portion 312 (forming a ball tank). 201 side), a cover portion 314 extending from the lower portion of the vertical wall portion 312 toward the left side (first guide passage forming portion 202 side), and an attachment A plurality of engaging portions 315A to 315D elastically deformable are mainly formed on the front side of the portion 311 and on the front and rear sides of the cover portion 314. As shown in FIG.

The first cover body 310 configured in this manner is configured such that the mounting portion 311 is attached to the sphere tank forming portion 201 while the vertical wall portion 312 is arranged near the boundary between the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 . By fitting the upper end of the front standing wall portion 203B from above, the plurality of locking portions 315A to 315D are elastically locked to the locked portion 317 (see FIG. 18) formed on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B. By doing so, it is attached to the first passage forming body 203 . In the attached state, the ball holding portion 313 is arranged to cover a portion of the downstream side of the ball tank forming portion 201 from above, and the cover portion 314 is arranged to cover a portion of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming portion 202. The upper surface of the cover portion 314 is arranged so as to be slightly downward toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 (see FIG. 9).

When the first cover body 310 is attached to the first passage forming body 203, the ball holding part 313 is arranged on the ball tank forming part 201 side, so that the ball tank forming part 201 is moved from the game island (not shown). Even when the supplied game balls are stored so as to pile up in the vertical direction, the game balls are rectified by being pressed downward by the ball pressing portion 313 when flowing down to the first guide passage forming portion 202 side. It is designed to be

In the cover portion 314, long holes 316A to 316C extending in the left-right direction and having the shape of a horizontally long rectangle in a plan view are formed vertically through the cover portion 314 while being arranged in parallel rows. Each of the long holes 316A-316C has the same longitudinal dimension L21, and the longitudinal dimension L21 is shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and the heads of the screw members N1-N6 and N11-N16 mentioned above. It is shorter than the diameter L2 of NH (L21<2R, L21<L2). In other words, the long holes 316A-316C are formed in a size that prevents the game balls and screw members N1-N6, N11-N16 from falling. Reinforcing ribs hang down from the peripheries of the long holes 316A to 316C on the lower surface of the cover portion 314. As shown in FIG.

In addition, since the long holes 316A to 316C are extended along the flowing direction of the game ball, as shown in FIGS. In this case, the game ball P can move in the downstream direction (left side).

(Second cover body 320)
As shown in FIGS. 14A to 14C, the second cover body 320 includes a plate-like cover portion 324 formed along the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and a cover portion 324 and a plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B which are elastically deformable. In the close state, the plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B are elastically locked to the locked portion 317 (see FIG. 20) formed on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 302B, so that the first passage forming body 203 Mounted on. In the attached state, the cover portion 324 covers a portion of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above, and is arranged so as to incline downward toward the flowing direction of the game ball (FIG. 9). reference).

On the upper surface of the cover portion 324, recessed grooves 326A to 326C extending in the left-right direction are formed in rows. The concave grooves 326A-326C have different front-to-rear dimensions L22A-L22C, but are each shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball (L22A-L22C<2R). The longitudinal dimension L22B of the central groove 326B, which has the longest longitudinal dimension, is longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L22B>L2). In other words, the recessed groove 326B is formed in a size that cannot accommodate game balls and that can accommodate the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16. Further, the front-rear dimension L22B of the groove 326B is longer than the front-rear dimension L21 of the long holes 316A to 316C of the cover portion 314 (L22B>L21).

In addition, since the front-rear dimension L22A of the recessed groove 326A and the front-rear dimension L22C of the recessed groove 326C are longer than the diameter L1 of the male screw portion NS of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L22B>L1, L22C>L1 ), and is sized to accommodate at least the externally threaded portion NS.

In addition, since the concave grooves 326A to 326C extend along the flowing direction of the game ball and are arranged so as to incline downward toward the flowing direction of the game ball, FIGS. 2, when the game ball P falls to the upper part of the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, the game ball P is guided in the flowing direction (left side).

(Third cover body 330)
As shown in FIGS. 15A to 15C and 16, the third cover body 330 includes a plate-like cover portion 334 formed along the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. A plurality of locking portions 335A to 335D elastically deformable formed on the front and rear sides of the left end of the cover portion 334 and a screw member N15 protruding between the locking portions 335C and 335D on the rear surface are attached from above. A mounting portion 331 having a hole H15 formed thereon and a ball stopper member 340 provided at the left end of the upper surface of the cover portion 334. It is elastically locked to a locked portion 317 (see FIG. 20) formed on the outer surface of the portion 302B, and the screw member N15 attached to the mounting hole H15 is screwed into the screw hole provided on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B. It is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by inserting it. In the attached state, the cover portion 334 covers the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above, and is arranged so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream direction of the game ball (see FIG. 9).

The cover portion 334 extends obliquely upward from the left side to the right side, and a concave portion 336 having a predetermined depth extends from the right end portion of the upper surface toward the left side. Since the right part reaches the meandering part 273 , it is formed corresponding to the shape of the meandering part 273 . At a position corresponding to the concave portion 336, a horizontally long U-shaped slit 337 is formed in plan view, thereby forming a rectifying plate 338 whose left end side is elastically deformable so as to swing vertically. At the right end, an inclined plate portion 339 inclined downward toward the right side is formed, so that the game balls P stacked up and down are guided toward the bottom wall portion 203A and leveled. (See Fig. 16).

The front-rear dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L23 >2R, L23>L2). That is, the recessed portion 336 is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the game ball P and the heads NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16. Further, the front-rear dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the front-rear dimension L22B of the recessed groove 326B of the cover portion 324 (L23>L22B).

In addition, since the concave portion 336 extends along the flowing direction of the game ball and is arranged so as to incline downward toward the flowing direction of the game ball, as shown in FIG. When the game ball P falls on the upper part of 336, the game ball P is guided toward the flowing direction (left side).

In addition, since the longitudinal dimension L24 of the slit 337 is shorter than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L24<L2), the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 ˜N16 do not drop from the slit 337.

The ball stopper member 340 includes a plate-like front wall portion 341A having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the rear, a rear wall portion 341B arranged on the rear side of the front wall portion 341A, and the front wall portion 341A and the rear wall portion 341B. It is composed of a rotating portion 341 having a connected left wall portion 341C, a projecting wall portion 341D projecting from the upper end of the left wall portion 341C, and a cylindrical shaft portion 342 facing in the front-rear direction. Bearing portions 343A and 343B are erected on the left side of the upper surface of the cover portion 334 to rotatably support the front and rear ends of the shaft portion 342 . A slit 344 is formed through the right side of the bearing portion 343A in the cover portion 334 so that the front wall portion 341A can be inserted therethrough.

As shown in FIG. 16 , when the third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage formation body 203 , the downstream portion of the first guide passage formation portion 202 is covered by the cover portion 324 . Since the cover portion 324 is arranged to be inclined downward toward the bottom wall portion 203A toward the downstream side (left side), the game balls P stacked up and down in the first guide passage forming portion 202 are covered with the cover portion 324. While flowing down, it is leveled, and finally it is made possible to flow out one by one from the communication hole 272. - 特許庁In particular, the straightening plate 338 is elastically deformable when a game ball comes into contact with it, so that it smoothes (rectifies) the game ball so as to press it downward to the extent that ball clogging does not occur.

(Ball stop member 340)
As shown in FIG. 16A, the ball stopper member 340 is rotatable between an upright position in which the rotating portion 341 stands up and a tilted position in which the rotating portion 341 tilts to the right. is located in the standing position, the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344 to allow the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to flow down to the second guide passage forming portion 204; The part 341 is positioned at the tilted position, the front wall part 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can contact the game ball, and the game ball of the first guide path formation part 202 cannot flow down to the second guide path formation part 204 (or difficult), that is, the ball-stopped state.

By setting the ball stop member 340 to the second state in this way, it is possible to restrict the entry of the game ball into the second guide passage formation portion 204, so that the game inside the second guide passage formation portion 204 in this state It is possible to extract the ball and remove the dispensing device 200 for inspection or replacement.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16A, when the ball stopper member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating portion 341 is opened and consists of a front wall portion 341A, a rear wall portion 341B, and a left wall portion 341C. The space surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall in plan view functions as a retaining portion in which the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can be retained as described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16B, when the ball stop member 340 is in the second state, the rotating portion 341 is tilted, but the protruding wall portion 341D is positioned in an upright state so as to cross the passage. Therefore, as will be described later, the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can be retained on the right side of the projecting wall portion 341D.

(Terminal board 210)
Next, the terminal board 210 will be described based on FIG. 17 with reference to FIG. 17, (A) is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame to which a terminal board is mounted, (B) is a KK section of (A), and (C) is a LL section of (B). .

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 17, the terminal board 210 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear, and has a cable connecting portion (not shown) to which a signal line cable (not shown) connected to the main board 11 or the like is detachable on the back. ) and a mounting member 232 provided with a plurality of connection holes 231 for connecting a plurality of cables C (see FIG. 3) connected to an external device such as a hall computer. Connection pinches (not shown) for pinching the ends of the cables C are provided inside the mounting member 232 at positions corresponding to the connection holes 231 . A spring (not shown) is provided for biasing the connection pinch in the direction of closing it, that is, in the direction of clamping the tip of the cable C. As shown in FIG. The mounting member 232 is provided with a plurality of operation portions 233 for opening each connection pinch (not shown) against the biasing force of a spring (not shown).

The number of cables C that can be connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 of the terminal board 210 as the first board provided above the first guide path forming part 202 is set to the first number (for example, 20). On the other hand, each signal line is also connected to a second board such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 provided below the first guide path forming portion 202, but the number of lines is less than the first number. It is set to the number (for example, 10).

A plurality of the operation portions 233 are provided corresponding to the respective connection holes 231, and have a substantially hook-like shape when viewed from the side, and are swung in the front-rear direction with the base end thereof as the swing axis. When opening the connection pinch (not shown), the operation portion 233 is pushed upward or downward to swing the operation portion 233, thereby releasing the connection pinch (not shown). When the tip of the cable C is inserted into the connection hole portion 231 with the connection pinch opened and the pressing operation of the operation portion 233 is stopped, the connection pinch is closed by the biasing force of the spring (not shown). Cable C comes to be held. The operation portions 233 arranged in the left-right direction have different shapes alternately in the left-right direction so that when a predetermined operation portion 233 is pressed, the adjacent operation portions 233 do not interfere with the pressing operation. there is

The substrate mounting frame 211 is mounted from the rear side to the mounting hole H6 formed in the upper portion while the locking piece 212 projecting downward from the lower side is inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. It is attached to the mounting member 223 by screwing the threaded member N6 into a threaded hole formed in the mounting member 223 . Further, a horizontally long rectangular opening 234 is formed in the board mounting frame 211 .

On the inner surface of the substrate mounting frame 211, a plurality of restricting portions 235 that restrict the forward movement of the terminal substrate 210 by engaging with the periphery of the terminal substrate 210 inserted from the front side, and the restricting portions 235 prevent the terminal substrate 210 from moving forward. a plurality of locking portions 236 that can be elastically locked from the front side to the peripheral edge of the terminal substrate 210 whose movement is restricted; have. Therefore, the terminal board 210 is inserted from the front side of the board mounting frame 211, and is elastically locked by the locking parts 236 in a state where forward movement is restricted by the plurality of restricting parts 235, thereby mounting the board. It is attached to the frame 211 . That is, the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by using a plurality of restricting portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from screw members (using a mounting method different from the mounting method using screw members). Mounted.

Since the terminal board 210 is formed with a plurality of connection holes 231 to which the cables C can be connected, during wiring work for connecting a plurality of cables C to the connection holes 231, an operation portion 233 corresponding to each cable C can be operated. need to operate. In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is fixed to the game island and the game machine frame 3 is opened for inspection by a game hall clerk or the like, the cable C hanging down from the upper part of the game island is attached to the outer frame. It may be pulled around in front of 60 and tension may be applied to the connection. In other words, since the terminal board 210 is likely to be subjected to a load on the mounting portion, if it is attached to the board mounting frame 211 or the mounting member 223 with a screw member, the screw member becomes loose and easily comes off. ing.

In addition, when the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211, the connection hole portion 231 and the operating portion 233 of the terminal board 210 face the rear side through the opening 234 (see FIG. 17A). ). Further, since the plurality of operation portions 233 protrude substantially horizontally toward the rear, the screw members N3 to N6 can be held by the plurality of operation portions 233 arranged side by side as described later. A recess 242 is formed between the lower portion of the terminal board 210 and the front portion of the board mounting frame 211 to accommodate the screw members N3 to N6.

(Mounting state of screw members N1 to N16)
Next, the mounting state of the screw members N1 to N16 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 21. FIG. FIG. 18 is a perspective view showing a state where the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back surface of the game frame is seen obliquely from behind. 19, (A) is a plan view showing the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back of the game frame, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM of (A). FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing a state in which the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back surface of the game frame is seen obliquely from behind. FIG. 21 is a plan view showing the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back side of the game frame. 22, (A) is a sectional view taken along line NN of FIG. 21, (B) is a view showing the rotating state of the screw member, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line OO of FIG. 23, (A) is a sectional view taken along line PP of FIG. 21, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line QQ of FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view taken along line RR of FIG. 21. FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view taken along line SS of FIG. 21. FIG. FIG. 26 shows (A) the retained state of the screw member when the ball stopper is in the first state, (B) is a TT sectional view of (A), and (C) is the ball stopper in the second state. (D) is a UU cross-sectional view of (C). FIG. 27 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing movement of the screw member. FIG. 28 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing the moving state of the game ball on the cover portion.

As shown in FIGS. 9, 18 and 19(A), screw members N1 to N1 for attaching the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 are provided on the sphere tank forming portion 201 and its periphery on the back surface of the frame 3 for the gaming machine. N2 and screw members N11, N12 and N15 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the mounting member 223 are mounted.

Specifically, the screw members N1 and N2 are attached forward from the back side at a position away from the sphere tank forming portion 201 to the right and below the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B of the sphere tank forming portion 201. Therefore, even if the screw members N1 and N2 are loosened and fall backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the possibility of falling into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. 18 is extremely low. .

The screw members N11 and N12 are attached forward from the back side on the outer surface of the right standing wall portion 203B of the sphere tank forming portion 201 and at a position below the upper edge of the sphere tank forming portion 201. Even if the screw members N11 and N12 are loosened and fall backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the possibility of falling into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. 18 is extremely low.

The screw member N15 is attached downward from the upper side on the outer surface of the right standing wall portion 203B of the ball tank forming portion 201 and at a position below the upper edge of the ball tank forming portion 201. Even if the screw member N15 loosens due to vibration or shock generated in the machine 1 and falls upward, the possibility of falling into the sphere tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. 18 is extremely low.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12 and N15 receive and store the game balls supplied from the replenishment device 150 from the circulation path above the game island and form a ball tank on which the load of many game balls is applied. Vibrations and impacts are likely to occur due to being arranged around the portion 201, so a screw member with a flange is used, which has a large contact area with the attached portion and is less prone to loosening.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 around the sphere tank forming portion 201 are located at positions where they are unlikely to fall into the sphere tank forming portion 201 even if they are loosened and fall off, that is, at the upper surface opening of the sphere tank forming portion 201. , the game balls supplied from the replenishing device 150 from the circulation path above the game islands are received and stored in the ball tank forming portion 201, which is open at the top. suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, the sphere tank forming portion 201 is close to (or may be in contact with) the upper surface side of the plate-like first projecting portion 224 projecting rearward from the mounting member 223. The gap L30 between the bottom wall portion 203A and the first projecting portion 224 is smaller than the diameter L1 of the male threaded portion NS of the screw member (L30<L1). It is almost impossible for the screw member to be caught between the wall portion 203A and the first projecting portion 224 and held in the vicinity of the sphere tank forming portion 201 .

Further, the gap L31 formed between the rear portion of the bottom wall portion 203A of the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220 is larger than the head portion L2 of the flanged screw member and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F. is also long (L3>L2), the flanged screw member is almost never caught in the gap L31 and held in the vicinity of the sphere tank forming portion 201. As shown in FIG.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19B, if the screw member N15 slips out of the mounting hole H15 as the mounted portion and falls onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220, the upper wall portion 220H is Since the screw member N15 is inclined downward toward the back side, the dropped screw member N15 flows down either rearward or leftward, so that it is almost never held in the vicinity of the sphere tank forming portion 201.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dropped screw member N15 from entering each of the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A provided below the sphere tank forming portion 201 and contacting the wiring of the substrate to cause disconnection or the like. .

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9, 20 and 21A, screw members N3 to N5 for attaching the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 and the substrate A screw member N6 for mounting the mounting frame 211 to the mounting member 223, screw members N13 and N14 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the mounting member 223, A threaded member N16 for attaching to is attached.

Specifically, the screw members N3 to N6 are separated from the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the front side and are positioned above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B of the first guide passage forming portion 202 toward the front from the rear side. In addition, the second projecting portion 225 of the mounting member 223 is arranged between the mounting position of each of the screw members N3 to N6 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the screw member Although there is a certain distance from the mounting position of each of N3 to N6 to the first guide passage forming portion 202, the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225 is inclined downward toward the back side, so the pachinko game machine 20, when the screw members N3 to N6 are loosened due to vibrations or shocks generated in 1 and fall off rearward, as shown in FIG. There is a high possibility that it will fall into the guide passage forming portion 202 .

As shown in FIGS. 20 to 22, the screw member N3 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position forwardly away from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. is attached to the mounting hole H3. Further, at a position corresponding to the mounting hole H3 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, a recessed groove 227 for avoiding interference with the head portion NH when mounting the screw member N3 to the mounting hole H3 is formed in a straight line toward the rear. has been extended to The groove 227 is formed so that the width of the groove 227 tapers toward the rear and becomes shallower. The bottom surface of 227 is substantially horizontal (or slightly slanted downward toward the rear side).

Therefore, when the screw member N3 is loosened and falls out backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that the screw member N3 falls into the concave groove 227 on the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225 (Fig. 22(A)). In addition, the screw member N3 that has fallen into the groove 227 is likely to be guided to move rearward in a straight line when vibration or impact occurs. , the screw member N3 is less likely to move rearward than in the region other than the concave groove 227. In other words, the concave groove 227 constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting the screw member N3 moving toward the first guiding passage forming portion 202 from falling into the first guiding passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

Here, all the screw members including the screw member N3 are composed of the head NH and the male threaded portion NS. In many cases, the screw member N3 tilted in a state where two points with the tip are in contact (see FIG. 22(A)), so that the tilted screw member N3 as shown in FIG. Occasionally, the head NH swings around the tip of the male threaded portion NS and changes direction. Therefore, if it falls on a flat surface other than the groove 227 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, or if it deviates from the rear end of the groove 227, it may move linearly backward, or the head may move backward. The NH may also move to turn left or right by rotating its head. That is, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 20, if it moves backward and bends to the right, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the first cover body 310, and if it moves backward linearly, it will most likely fall onto the first cover body 310. There is a high possibility that it will fall on the second cover body 320, and if it moves backward and bends to the left, there is a high possibility that it will fall on the horizontal wall portion 264 in front of the first guide passage.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the screw member N3 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H3 is guided to the rear end of the recessed groove 227 and then bent rearward to the right, the first cover body There is a high possibility of falling onto the cover portion 314 of 310 . As shown in FIG. 22A, when the screw member N3 drops onto the cover portion 314, the screw member N3 tilts so that the male threaded portion NS intersects the long holes 316A to 316C, or the male threaded portion NS falls. Although it is inserted into any one of the long holes 316A to 316C, the head NH is retained on the cover portion 314 without falling from the cover portion 314 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 by being locked without falling off. will do. In other words, the long holes 316A to 316C prevent the screw member N3 from dropping onto the first guide passage forming portion 202 onto the cover portion 314 provided so as to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a predetermined limiter for limiting.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the groove 227 is guided to the rear end of the groove 227 and then linearly moved rearward, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320 or the first passage is formed. It is likely to fall on horizontal wall 264 of body 203 . As shown in FIG. 22(C), when the threaded member N3 falls onto the cover portion 324, the threaded member N3 tilts so that the male threaded portion NS intersects the grooves 326A to 326C. A portion of the head NH is accommodated in the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, so that the head portion NH stays on the cover portion 324 without falling from the cover portion 324 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 . In other words, the concave grooves 326A to 326C prevent the screw member N3 from falling onto the cover portion 324 provided to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from falling onto the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a predetermined limiter for limiting.

In addition, when falling onto the horizontal wall portion 264 of the first passage forming body 203 provided between the rear wall portion 225B of the second projecting portion 225 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, the horizontal wall portion 264 Stay in a state of leaning to. That is, the horizontal wall portion 264 side is arranged between the rear wall portion 225B and the first guide passage forming portion 202 below the upper edge of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B, so that the upper wall portion 225A, the vertical wall portion 203B and the horizontal wall portion 264 form a concave portion 290 with an open top, so that the liquid is accommodated and retained in the concave portion 290. As shown in FIG. That is, the recess 290 is provided between the mounting hole H3 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and the screw member that has moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 It constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting N3 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202 .

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, in the first passage forming body 203, the screw member N13 is separated forward from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and slightly above the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is attached to the attachment hole H13 formed in the attachment piece 263 which is the position. Therefore, when the screw member N13 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a possibility that the screw member N13 falls into the recess 280 formed near the rear side of the mounting hole H13 in the horizontal wall portion 264. high (see FIG. 23(A)). More specifically, the horizontal wall portion 264 is arranged between the mounting piece 263 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 below the upper edge of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B. A recess 280 smaller than the recess 290 is formed in the vicinity of the mounting hole H13 in the recess 290 opened upward by 225A, the standing wall portion 203B and the horizontal wall portion 264, so that the recess 280 is accommodated and stays in the recess 280. Become.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 23B, when the screw member N13 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the screw member N13 is arranged on the lower left side of the horizontal wall portion 264. It may drop and stay in the concave portion 214 provided near the right side of the board mounting frame 211 . That is, the recess 214 is provided between the mounting hole H13 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and the screw member that has moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 It constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting N13 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N4 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position forwardly away from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is attached to the mounting hole H4. Therefore, when the screw member N4 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that the screw member N4 falls onto the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225 (see FIG. 24).

As shown in FIGS. 20, 21 and 24, the screw member N4 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H4 moves backward when it bends to the right, moves backward linearly, and moves backward. As shown in FIG. 24, in any of the cases where the board is turned to the right, it falls from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 from above the upper wall portion 225A. The screw member N4 dropped from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H enters the inside through the opening 234 and stays in the concave portion 242 formed by the substrate mounting frame 211 and the terminal substrate 210, or stays in the substrate mounting frame. Although the male threaded portion NS is inserted into the recessed portion 243 formed between 211 and the standing wall portion 203B, the head portion NH may be retained by being locked without falling off. That is, the recessed portion 242 and the recessed portion 243 are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and move toward the first guide passage forming portion 202. A special restricting portion for restricting the screw member N4 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202 is constructed.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 24, when the screw member N4 drops from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H, the screw member N4 may be held on the plurality of operation portions 233. As shown in FIG. In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is fixed to the game island, the plurality of cables C connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 hang down from the upper part of the game island (see FIG. 3). C may also prevent the screw member N4 from falling from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H. That is, the operating portion 233 and the cable C are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and move toward the first guiding passage forming portion 202. This constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting the falling of the threaded member N4 into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

Further, when the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and moves rearward so as to bend to the right, and then crosses the vertical wall portion 203B, the first cover body 203 is removed from the upper surface opening of the first guide passage forming portion 202. 310 , an uncovered region 350 provided between the second cover body 320 and the third cover body 330 , which is not covered by either the second cover body 320 or the third cover body 330 , to the first guide passage forming portion 202 . to fall. The screw member N4 that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 falls out from between the game balls while moving toward the downstream side as the game ball P flows down, and approaches the bottom wall portion 203A. It falls from one of the holes 271B to 271D formed at the position corresponding to the non-coated area 350 in the guide passage forming portion 202 and is discharged out of the first guide passage forming portion 202. FIG.

Further, even if it does not fall from any one of the holes 271B to 271D, it will eventually fall from one of the holes 271A to 271H and be discharged out of the first guide passage forming portion 202. FIG. In other words, the holes 271A to 271H constitute specific restricting portions for restricting movement of the screw member N4 that has fallen into the sphere tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and moves backward and bends to the left, and then crosses the standing wall portion 203B, the screw member N4 falls onto the concave portion 336 on the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330. By dropping, it is accommodated and stays in the concave portion 336 without dropping from the cover portion 334 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 . In other words, the recessed portion 336 restricts the screw member N4 from dropping onto the first guide passage forming portion 202, which has fallen onto the cover portion 334 provided so as to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202. constitutes a predetermined limit part of

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N6 is formed in the substrate mounting frame 211 at a position forwardly away from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. is attached to the mounting hole H6. Therefore, if the screw member N6 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 (see FIG. 25).

As shown in FIGS. 20, 21 and 25, the screw member N6 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H6 is guided by a plurality of ribs 211A extending rearward so as to move linearly rearward. After that, when it moves so as to bend to the right, as shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 16, the cover part 334 covers the upper opening of the first guide passage forming part 202 so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream side (dispensing device 200 side). There is a high possibility that the screw member N6 that has fallen to a position in the vicinity of the upstream side of the ball stopper member 340 will move toward the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 26, the screw member N6 that has moved downstream comes into contact with the ball stop member 340 provided at the downstream end (left end) of the cover portion 334, which is the lower inclined side, and Left side) is restricted to stay on the cover portion 334 .

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, when the ball stop member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating portion 341 is opened, and the front wall portion 341A and the rear wall portion 341B are opened. , the left wall portion 341C, and the screw member N6 can be retained in the space surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall portion in plan view. be able to. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 26(C) and 26(D), when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, the protruding wall portion 341D is positioned so as to cross the passage in an upright state, so that the screw member N6 is placed on the protruding wall. Since the screw member N6 can be retained on the right side of the portion 341D, the screw member N6 can be held without dropping from the cover portion 334. FIG.

In the second state, the projecting wall portion 341D is arranged so as to intersect the inclination direction, and the front and rear sides are open, so that the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted may drop backward or forward. On the other hand, in the first state, the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C cover the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C. It can be retained more reliably than in the second state in which the left wall portion 341C is positioned only on the left side. In other words, the ball stopper member 340 is provided on the side of the dispensing device 200 in the inclined direction of the cover portion 334, and constitutes a specific portion capable of causing the screw member N6 dropped onto the cover portion 334 to stay in the cover portion 334. is doing.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the threaded member N5 is separated from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the mounting member 223 to the front and right side, and is positioned above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. Although it is attached to the formed mounting hole H5, the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not arranged right behind the mounting hole H5, and the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 is also cut halfway. Therefore, if the screw member N5 loosens due to vibration or impact and falls out backward, it will drop onto the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225, but before it reaches the first guide passage forming portion 202, There is a high possibility of dropping from the upper wall portion 225</b>A to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202 .

The screw member N16 is attached to an attachment hole H16 formed in the third cover body 330 on the rear side of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and below the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B. Therefore, if the screw member N5 is loosened by vibration or impact and falls out backward, it is highly likely that it will fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 without falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. .

(action/effect)
As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. N3 to N6, etc. are loosened due to vibrations and impacts generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and fall off, and after moving backward on the upper wall portion 225A due to vibrations, impacts, opening and closing of the game machine frame 3, etc., the cover When it falls on the parts 314, 324, 334, the long holes 316A to 316C, the concave grooves 326A to 326C, the concave part 336 and the ball stop member 340 restrict the fall to the first guide passage forming part 202, Since there is a high possibility that the screws will remain on the cover portions 314, 324, 334 without falling from the cover portions 314, 324, 334 into the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screws that have fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 It is possible to prevent the member from moving and being mixed into the dispensing device 200 . In addition, since vertical wall portions are formed at the left (downstream) ends of the long holes 316A to 316C and the grooves 326A to 326C, even if the screw member moves to the left, can be suitably prevented from falling.

Further, as shown in FIG. 28 , on the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 , the regions other than the uncovered region 350 are covered with the cover portions 314 , 324 and 334 , but the sphere tank forming portion 201 Even if the replenished game ball spills out and gets on the cover parts 314, 324 on the upstream side, the longitudinal dimensions of the long holes 316A to 316C and the concave grooves 326A to 326C are smaller than the diameter 2R of the game ball P. Since the space is also narrow, the game ball P rolls leftward and then falls from the left end of the cover portion 324 to the uncovered area 350 and is returned into the first guide path forming portion 202 .

Therefore, not only can the game ball that has landed on the cover portions 314 and 324 be returned into the first guide path forming portion 202, but also the game ball P can be retained in the long holes 316A to 316C and the concave grooves 326A to 326C. As a result, the space in which the falling screw member N stays is restricted, or it comes into contact with the staying game ball and falls from the uncovered area 350 into the first guide passage forming part 202. can be prevented.

In addition, when the game ball falls on the cover portion 334, it either flows down on the cover portion 334 toward the left side and is restricted by the ball stopper member 340, or falls outside the first guide passage forming portion 202. do.

In addition, in the long holes 316A to 316C as the first retaining portion and the concave grooves 326A to 326C as the second retaining portion, the concave groove 326B is provided at a position closer to the dispensing device 200 than the long holes 316A to 316C, A front-rear dimension L22B is larger than a front-rear dimension L22 of the long hole 316B (L22B>L21). By doing so, the screw member is more likely to be retained in the retaining portion as it approaches the dispensing device 200, so that the screw member dropped onto the cover portions 314 and 324 moves and falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202. can be prevented.

On the other hand, the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen and stayed on the cover portions 314, 324, and 334 move due to vibration, impact, etc., and the non-covered portions provided between the cover portions 324 and 334 move. When it falls from the region 350 into the first guide passage forming portion 202, or after moving backward on the upper wall portion 225A like the screw member N4, it falls from the uncovered region 350 to the first guiding passage forming portion 202. Even if the game ball P falls directly inside the first guide passage forming portion 202, it falls out from between the game balls while moving toward the downstream side and approaches the bottom wall portion 203A. As a result, the screw member dropped into the first guide passage forming portion 202 moves to the dispensing device 200 because it falls from one of the holes 271A to 271H and is discharged outside the first guide passage forming portion 202. Mixing can be suppressed.

A plurality of holes 271A to 271H formed in the bottom wall portion 203A are formed from the midstream portion (near the meandering portion 273) to the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. There is a region where no hole is formed between the holes 270A and 270B which are formed close to each other and the hole 271A which is the most upstream of the holes 271A to 271H. In this way, since a region in which a plurality of holes are not formed is formed in the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, the game balls from the ball tank forming portion 201 flow down in a state of being stacked up and down. By doing so, it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in the strength of the bottom wall portion 203A in the vicinity of the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to which ball pressure is applied.

In addition, by forming a region in which no holes are formed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 in this manner, the screw member dropped from the first guide passage forming portion 202 is formed in the rear wall portion of the cover body 220. Entry into the cover body 220 through the heat radiation hole 220B (see FIG. 6) or the like can be appropriately suppressed.

In addition, by providing the first cover body 310 and the second cover body 320 at positions corresponding to the regions where the holes are not formed in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the first guide passage forming portion 202 is provided with a screw member. can be suppressed from falling, and it is suppressed that the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 does not fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 and is mixed into the dispensing device 200. be able to.

In addition, the hole 271H, which is the largest among the plurality of holes 271A to 271H, is provided at the position closest to the dispensing device 200, so that the screw member can be preferably transferred from the hole 271H to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27, when a screw member falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the ball tank forming portion 201 or the uncovered region 350, the game ball is are stacked vertically, the screw member is often located above the game ball, but the hole portion 271H is arranged downstream of the straightening plate 338 of the cover portion 334, that is, , Since the game ball is arranged in a position where the game ball is rectified vertically, the screw member easily falls into the hole 271H. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

Further, since at least some of the holes 271B to 271D among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided at positions corresponding to the uncovered regions 350 in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw member is uncovered. Even if it enters the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the region 350, it can be dropped out of the first guide passage forming portion 202 through the holes 271B to 271D.

Furthermore, at least some of the holes 271E to 271H among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided closer to the dispensing device 200 than the uncovered region 350 in the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the above-described Even if the game ball that has fallen from the uncovered area 350 to the first guide passage forming part 202 does not reach the holes 271B to 271D, it moves downward while moving with the flow of the game ball and falls from the holes 271E to 271H. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

Further, as shown in FIGS. 22C, 23A, 23B, and 24, the screw members N3 to N6 that have moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 are moved toward the first guide passage forming portion. Recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 as special retention portions that can be retained before reaching 202 are below screw members N3 to N6 attached to attachment holes H3 to H6 as attachment portions. The screw members N3 to N6 provided in the mounting holes H3 to H6 but not retained in the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243 can move toward the cover portions 314, 324, 334. , the screw members N3 to N6 detached from the mounting holes H3 to H6 can be prevented from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

Further, since the depths of the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243 are the depths at which the screw members N3 to N6 partially protrude when the screw members N3 to N6 are accommodated, the recesses 280, 290, The screw members N3 to N6 staying in 214, 242, 243 can be easily taken out.

In addition, the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243, the long holes 316A to 316C, the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, and the recess 336 restrict the falling screw member from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. Not only does it block (or hinder), but it is a retention part that can be retained outside the first guide path formation part 202, so that the screw member can be found when a store clerk or the like at the game parlor conducts an inspection or the like. Since it becomes possible to identify which screw member has come off, it becomes easier to take countermeasures against mixing of the screw member into the dispensing device 200 .

Further, the ball stopper member 340 as the specific portion has the rotating portion 341 positioned at the upright position, the front wall portion 341A deviating upward from the slit 344, and the game ball in the first guide passage forming portion 202 being guided to the second direction. A first state in which it is possible to flow down to the passage forming portion 204, the rotating portion 341 is positioned at the tilted position, the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can come into contact with the game ball, and the first guiding passage forming portion 202 is opened. It is possible to change to a second state in which the game ball cannot flow down to the second guide passage forming part 204 (or difficult to flow down), and when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, it is in the first state. Since the screw member is more likely to stay than in the case of , it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

More specifically, the reason why the ball stopper member 340 is set to the second state is, as described above, when the game ball in the first guide passage or the second guide passage is pulled out, that is, when the game parlor clerk or the like operates the pachinko game machine. 1, the ball stop member 340 is put in the first state, while the pachinko game machine 1 is in operation, that is, when the game hall clerk or the like cannot monitor it. Therefore, it is possible to preferably prevent the screw member from entering the first guide passage forming portion 202 in such a state.

In addition, the sphere tank forming portion 201 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations by screw members N11 to N14 having flange portions F as looseness preventing portions. The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching to the game machine frame 3 are arranged so as to fall outside the first guide path formation part 202 even if they are detached from the game machine frame 3. It is mounted below the upper edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the tank forming portion 201 . Therefore, the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the sphere tank forming part 201 are easily loosened due to vibration and the weight of the game ball. Even if the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the first guide passage forming part 202 come off, they will fall outside the first guide passage forming part 202. can be prevented from being mixed into

Further, among the plurality of screw members for attaching the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the game machine frame 3, a predetermined screw member (for example, the screw member N12) near the periphery of the pachinko game machine 1 ) is also used as a screw member for attaching the ground wire (for example, the ground wire 226), so that the number of screw members (the number of parts) can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the screw member from entering the dispensing device 200 . Incidentally, instead of the ground wire, a screw member for attaching a predetermined member other than the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 may also be used.

Further, the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the ball tank forming part 201 to the game machine frame 3 are attached to the metal plate 222 for reinforcing the game machine frame 3, so that the ball tank forming part 201 can be firmly attached, and vibrations are less likely to occur, so loosening of the screw member can be suitably suppressed.

Further, the screw members N3 to N6 attached to the upper position of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the game machine frame 3 are screw members having a head portion NH with a small diameter that does not have a flange portion F. Even if it falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202, it can be easily dropped from the holes 271A to 271H, so that the screw member can be prevented from entering the dispenser 200. FIG.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 19(B) and 27, in the area below the first guide passage forming portion 202 on the game board 2 detachable from the frame 3 for the game machine, the fallen screw member is placed backward. Alternatively, an inclined surface (for example, the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220) that can flow down to the dispensing device 200 side is provided with a gap from the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the cover body 220 It is possible to prevent the screw member that has dropped on the upper wall portion 220H from jumping and being mixed into the first guide passage forming portion 202 again.

Also, although not shown, the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A are provided so as not to protrude rearward from the rear wall portion of the cover body 220, and drop onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220. The screw members are guided so as to flow backward or toward the dispensing device 200 side, thereby preventing the screw members falling on the upper wall portion 220H from falling into the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A arranged below. can be prevented.

In addition, the cover body 220 is provided so as to cover the image display device 5 provided on the back side of the game board 2, the production device having a movable body, and the production control board 12, so that the drive source of these is generated. A plurality of heat radiation holes 220B for releasing heat are formed in the upper part of the rear wall (see FIG. 6). It is preferably of a size that does not allow NH to be inserted. In addition, since there is a high possibility that screw members will fall from the upper holes 270A, 270B, and 271A to 271H of the upper wall portion 220H arranged directly below the first guide passage forming portion 202, the heat radiation hole 220B is Preferably, it is formed at least at positions not corresponding to the holes 270A, 270B, and 271A to 271H in the upper wall portion 220H, or formed at a portion other than the upper wall portion 220H (for example, the rear wall portion). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the falling screw member from falling into the cover body 220 and adversely affecting the image display device 5, the performance device having the movable body, the performance control board 12, and the like.

(Modification 1)
Next, Modification 1 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29A is a schematic rear view showing a cover portion as a modified example, and FIG. 29B is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired so as to intersect the cover portion.

In the above-described embodiment, the guiding passage forming portion that forms the guiding passage for guiding the game balls of the ball tank forming portion 201 to the payout device 200 is the first ball tank forming portion extending to the left side so as to incline downward. It has a guiding passage forming portion 202 and a second guiding passage forming portion 204 extending downward from the lower left end portion of the first guiding passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG. 16, the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330, which is provided so as to partially cover the upper surface, is provided with a ball stopper member 340 protruding upward from the upper surface of the left end. In the above, the configuration in which the screw member N moving to the left on the cover portion 334 can be received and retained has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cover portion of Modification 1 Like 360, the left end portion 360R of the cover portion 360 may be formed in an R shape that curves toward the second guide passage forming portion 204 below.

By doing so, the game ball P and the screw member N that have fallen onto the cover portion 360 do not remain on the cover portion 360 when moving toward the left end side, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 Since the screw member N directly falls outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the left end portion of the screw member N, it is possible to prevent the screw member N from being mixed into the dispensing device 200 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 29B, in the cover portion 360 in which a recess 361 capable of retaining the screw member N is formed in the upper surface thereof, a second A cable CH may be provided so as to intersect the flowing direction of the game ball in the 1 guide passage forming portion 202 .

By doing so, the movement of the screw member N and the game ball P, which are retained in the recessed portion 361 but may move due to the inclination, can be restricted by the cable C so as to be retained.

(description of variations and applications)
For example, in the above-described embodiment, screw members N1 to 6 and N11 to 16 for attaching the mounting member 223 and the first passage forming body 203 to the game machine frame 3 of the pachinko game machine 1, Screw members (not shown) attached to other parts of the game machine 1, screw members (not shown) for assembling the building blocks that make up the game island, and various devices (for example, , replenishment device 150, etc.) and the like have been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. All screw members such as screw members that have remained in the pachinko game machine 1 for some reason such as forgetting to install them during maintenance at the place can be targeted, but at least they have been installed in the pachinko game machine 1 in advance. It is preferable that the screw member can be prevented from being mixed into the dispensing device 200 .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a storage portion capable of storing game media, the sphere tank forming portion 201 formed in a box-like shape with an open upper surface by the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion B is applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the storage portion can store game balls, the front-rear dimension is larger than the front-rear dimension of the first guide passage-forming portion 202 like the ball tank-forming portion 201 described above. It does not have to be long, and the front-to-rear dimension may be substantially the same as or shorter than that of the first guide passage forming portion 202 . In addition, as long as the game balls supplied from the supply device 150 can be received, the upper surface does not necessarily have to be open.

In the above-described embodiment, the payout device 200 capable of paying out game balls with a rotatable sprocket is applied as a payout unit capable of paying out game media, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be a payout device that can pay out game balls by members other than sprockets.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion 203B serve as the guide passage forming portion having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding the game media in the storage portion to the payout portion. Although the configuration in which the groove-shaped first guide passage forming portion 202 is applied is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the guide is composed of a tubular member having an opening formed in a part of the upper surface. It may be a passage forming portion, and the shape, size, and the like can be variously changed. In addition, the width dimension (front-rear dimension) of the ball tank forming part 201 may be substantially the same or larger, and the game balls may be guided so as to flow down in a plurality of rows.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball tank forming portion 201 as a storage portion capable of storing game balls and the first guide passage whose upper surface is open and which guides the game balls in the ball tank forming portion 201 to the payout device 200 are provided. Although the form in which the first guiding passage forming portion 202 to be formed is integrally formed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guiding passage forming portion 202 are separately formed. The members may be integrally formed by assembling them with screw members or the like. In this case, the threaded member for assembling the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is also subject to the threaded member of the present invention.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the screw member can enter from the top opening of the first guide passage forming portion 202 was illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 The screw member may enter through a hole or a notch formed on the vertical wall side. In addition, when a screw member may be mixed in the second guide passage forming portion 204, a predetermined restricting portion for restricting the fall of the screw member to the second guide passage forming portion 204, or the second guide passage forming portion 204 A specific restricting portion or the like for restricting the movement of the dropped screw member to the dispenser 200 may be provided.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330 are applied as the cover parts provided so as to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming part 202. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire area of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be covered with the cover portion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the cover portion that covers a partial region of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be configured by a member separate from the first guide passage forming portion 202, It may be integrally formed with the first guide passage forming portion 202 in advance. In other words, the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be formed in advance in a square tubular shape.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the screw member is retained on the cover portion as a predetermined limiting portion for limiting the drop of the screw member dropped onto the cover portions 314, 324, 334 to the first guide passage forming portion 202. Although the embodiments in which the elongated holes 316A to 316C as the holes that allow the thread to be inserted, the grooves 326A to 326C and the recess 336 as the recesses are applied, the present invention is not limited to this, and the screw member A fall restriction part (drop obstruction part) that can restrict (or obstruct) the fall from the cover part, and a movement restriction part (movement obstruction part) that can restrict (or obstruct) the movement of the screw member on the cover part Alternatively, it may be a drop guide portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member so that it can fall from the cover portion to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202 . Note that the means capable of restricting or inhibiting falling or movement may be not only the protrusions and recesses, but also magnets capable of attracting metal screw members, adhesive parts capable of adhering screw members, and the like.

In other words, the predetermined limit portion for limiting the drop of the screw member dropped onto the cover portions 314 , 324 , 334 onto the first guide passage forming portion 202 is Not only those that make it impossible to fall, but also those that make it difficult to fall.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of specific restricting portions are provided in the first guiding passage forming portion 202 to restrict the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guiding passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200 is restricted ( Alternatively, it may be a movement restricting portion (movement inhibiting portion) capable of inhibiting movement. It should be noted that the means capable of restricting or inhibiting the movement to the dispensing device 200 side is not limited to the protrusions and recesses, but may be a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member, an adhesive portion capable of adhering the screw member, or the like. However, it is preferable to provide them at positions that do not affect the flow of the game ball (for example, the corners between the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion 203B, which are not in contact with the game ball).

That is, the specific restricting portion provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202 for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the dispensing device 200 is the dispensing device 200 for the screw member. If the movement to the side can be restricted, the movement of the screw member mixed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the dispensing device 200 side is not necessarily disabled, and the movement can be made difficult. Anything is fine.

Further, when the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the dispensing device 200 is restricted (restricted, inhibited) by the specific restricting portion provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the movement is restricted. There is a high possibility that the screw member that is restricted and stays in the first guide passage restricts the downflow of the game ball, resulting in ball clogging. When ball clogging occurs, the replenishment error notification is executed as described above, so that the game hall clerk or the like opens the game machine frame 3 to form the ball tank forming part 201 on the back or the first guide passage. There is a high possibility that the state of the game ball in the section 202 will be visually inspected. At this time, since the screw member remains in the first guide passage forming portion 202 without moving to the dispensing device 200, it becomes easier for the store clerk or the like to identify that the ball clogging was caused by the screw member. Appropriate measures can be taken.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, all of the plurality of holes 271A to 271H have a size that allows the screw member to drop, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the plurality of holes 271A 271H are formed so that the screw member can be dropped, the other holes may not be capable of dropping the screw member. Moreover, the shape and size of the plurality of holes 271A to 271H are arbitrary and can be changed in various ways without being limited to the above-described forms.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 and the production control board 12 are applied as the first board attached to the lower position than the first guide passage forming part 202, but the present invention is limited to this. Other substrates such as relay substrates may also be targeted.

In the above-described embodiment, the terminal substrate 210 is applied as the second substrate attached above the first guide passage forming portion 202, but the present invention is not limited to this. , other substrates such as a relay substrate may be used as the second substrate.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 as the first board are exemplified by the form in which the board cases 11A and 12A in which these boards are accommodated are attached to the game board 2 by the screw members N20 and N21. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the various substrates as the first substrate may be attached directly to the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3 without interposing the substrate case.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 as the first board are configured such that the board cases 11A and 12A in which each board is accommodated are screw members N20 and N21, that is, screw members are used. The terminal board 210 as the second board is attached to the game board 2 by an attachment method, using locking means consisting of a plurality of restricting portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from screw members, that is, Although a form in which the board mounting frame 211 is mounted by a mounting method different from the mounting method using a screw member is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. It may include attachment means, adhesion means using an adhesive or the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the screw member is provided around the first guide passage forming portion 202 to restrict the screw member moving toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As a special restricting portion for making the first guiding passage forming portion 202 of the screw member, the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 are applied, but the present invention is not limited to this. a fall restricting portion (fall inhibiting portion) capable of regulating (or inhibiting) the fall of, a movement regulating portion (movement inhibiting portion) capable of regulating (or inhibiting) movement of the screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202, , a drop guide portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member so that it can drop out of the first guide passage forming portion 202, or the like. In addition, as a means capable of restricting or inhibiting the falling or movement of the first guide passage forming portion 202, not only the convex portion and the concave portion, but also a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member and a magnet capable of adhering the screw member. It may be an adhesive portion or the like.

In other words, the special restricting portion for restricting the falling of the detached screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not only the portion that disables the dropping of the screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202, Any material can be used as long as it makes it difficult to fall. For example, a convex portion as a fall restricting portion (fall inhibiting portion) and a concave portion or a hole as a movement restricting portion (movement inhibiting portion) may be provided at predetermined positions of the upper wall portion 225A or the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in which the concave portions 280, 290, 214, 242, 243, etc., are provided as the special restricting portion is in the vicinity of the front standing wall portion 203B. Although it was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least it is provided in the vicinity of the vertical wall portion 203B as long as it is between the mounting portion (mounting hole) to which the screw member is mounted and the guide passage forming portion. For example, it may be provided at a position closer to the attached portion than the guide passage forming portion between the attached portion and the guide passage forming portion of the screw member.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first Although the form which applied the ball stop member 340 which can change to the 1st state which makes the game ball of the guidance passage formation part 202 flow down, and the 2nd state which makes it difficult or impossible to flow down was illustrated, this invention It is not limited to this, and any member provided on the side of the payout device 200 in the inclined direction (lower side of the inclination) of the cover portion 334 may restrict the movement of the screw member even if it does not have a ball stopper function. It may be a convex portion, a standing wall portion, or a wiring retainer that can (or obstruct).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball stopper member 340 as the specific portion is provided on the payout device 200 side in the inclined direction of the cover portion 334, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the specifying portion may be provided at the end portion of the dispensing device 200 side of the cover portions 314 and 324 as long as it is provided at the dispensing device 200 side end portion of one cover portion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball stopper member 340 as the specific portion is configured by a member separate from the cover portion 334, but the present invention is not limited to this. A specific portion (a ball stop portion) may be integrally formed with a part of the member that constitutes the cover portion 334 .

Further, in the above embodiment, as an example of the locking portion, the flange portion F (washer) having a larger diameter than the head portion NH of the screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16 and integrally formed with the head portion NH However, the present invention is not limited to this, instead of the flange portion F, a washer or the like that is formed separately from the screw member and can be attached to the screw member may be used, or the head Also included are the anti-rotation portion of the head NH formed in an uneven shape on the back surface of the NH and the flange portion F (washer), an adhesive agent, and the like. Moreover, the threaded member is not limited to one that can be attached with a tool such as a screwdriver, but may be a thumbscrew, or includes a member such as a screw or a bolt that separates from the attached portion when loosened.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball tank forming portion 201 as the storage portion is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations by the screw members N11 to N14 having the flange portion F as the locking portion to form the ball tank. The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the portion 201 and the first guiding passage forming portion 202 to the game machine frame 3 are designed so as to fall outside the first guiding passage forming portion 202 even if they come off the game machine frame 3. , the first guiding passage forming portion 202 and the sphere tank forming portion 201 are mounted below the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B of the sphere tank forming portion 201, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the position is above the upper end edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the guiding passage forming portion 202 or the ball tank forming portion 201, for example, it may be displaced in the horizontal direction from the position directly above the first guiding passage forming portion 202 or the ball tank forming portion 201. If the screw member is attached at a non-directly above position, it is possible to prevent the screw member from directly falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202 . Further, the dropped screw member is guided to fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 by a predetermined guiding portion (for example, a concave groove formed in the upper wall portion 225A). good too.

Further, the predetermined restriction portion, the specific restriction portion, the special restriction portion, and the specific portion in the above-described embodiments are not only the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the pachinko game machine 1, but also the pachinko game such as game islands. Although the embodiment of restricting or regulating (obstructing) the movement of the screw member other than the machine 1 to the payout device 200 has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least the screw member is attached to the pachinko game machine 1. Restrict or restrict the movement of the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16, and the screw members N3 to N6 attached above the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the sphere tank forming portion 201 to the dispensing device 200. It is preferably formed in a size and shape that allow (inhibition).

(Characteristic part 053SG)
Next, a form for implementing a gaming machine in the characterizing part 053SG according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 30-1 to 30-24.

The game machine in the characteristic part 053SG is a pachinko game machine or a slot machine installed in a game hall or the like, and in particular, as shown in FIG. Equipped with a game control board. As the game machine described below, the pachinko game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment can be applied, and the main board 11 of the above-described embodiment can be applied as the game control board, and the effect control board 12 can be applied as the effect control board. is.

As shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is connected with a plurality of input components such as various switches and sensors for detecting input conditions according to the progress of the game. Input components include, for example, detection switches that detect operations by the player, detection switches that detect the passage of game media such as game balls and medals, sensors that specify the positions of movable objects used in games such as reels, detection switches used for various settings such as the degree of advantage of the door, and detection switches for detecting door opening, abnormalities, and the like.

In addition, the game control board, as shown in FIG. 30-1, is equipped with an input circuit that detects the input signal from these input components, and the detection status of the input signal from the input component by the input circuit is specified. The input data is transmitted to the game control microcomputer and used for game control by the game control microcomputer.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is connected to a plurality of output components such as indicators, LEDs, motors, solenoids, etc., which perform output control according to the progress of the game. Output components include, for example, a display that displays according to the lottery result, a display that displays the progress of the game and the state of the gaming machine, a display that instructs the player on the operation mode, and a value owned by the player. , an LED that indicates the game state, an LED that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality, a motor, a solenoid, and the like that operate movable parts used in the game, such as reels and variable winning devices.

In addition, the game control board, as shown in FIG. 30-1, is provided with an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the corresponding output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. , the game control microcomputer transmits output data to the output circuit, thereby controlling the output components according to the progress of the game.

In addition, the game control microcomputer, the input circuit and the output circuit are connected via a data bus, and input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The transmission of the output data of is through a shared data bus.

Also, not all input circuits are connected via a shared data bus, but some input circuits are connected directly to the game control microcomputer without a data bus, and are connected to a shared data bus. Input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer without going through.

The output circuits are all connected via a shared data bus. The configuration may be such that the output data is transmitted from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit without passing through the data bus.

In addition, the data bus is connected to an external output terminal, and the output data from the game control microcomputer is output to the external device as an external output signal. It is possible to inspect the performance of the game machine using the output data output as.

Next, the game control board provided in the gaming machine of the present invention will be explained using the following Examples 1 to 3.

The structure of the game control board in Example 1 will be described. The game control board has electronic components mounted on one surface and no electronic components mounted on the other surface, and has a configuration in which the terminals of the electronic components are soldered. The surface is called a mounting surface, and the surface on which no electronic component is mounted and terminals of the electronic component are soldered is called a soldering surface.

FIG. 30-2 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-3 is a diagram showing the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 30-2 and 30-3, the game control board has a rectangular shape consisting of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and has an insulating printed board. Consists of In addition, the game control board is formed with a plurality of through holes passing through the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board are configured with conductors so as to appropriately connect the through holes. A plurality of wiring patterns are formed. In addition, in the area where the wiring pattern is not formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board, a ground area is formed by an insulating area made of an insulator and a conductor and forming a ground. The ground area is a solid ground formed over almost the entire area other than the area where the wiring pattern and the insulating area are formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board.

As shown in FIG. 30-2, wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are arranged on the mounting surface in a larger proportion than wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction, and on the other hand, as shown in FIG. , more wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction are arranged than wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction. Therefore, the wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are concentrated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction are concentrated on the soldering surface. Designs such as bypassing wiring patterns can be reduced as much as possible.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-3, the wiring pattern arranged on the solder surface has many wires extending in the same horizontal direction as the long side, so the wiring pattern distance is longer than the wiring pattern arranged on the mounting surface. However, as mentioned above, electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, not on the soldering surface, and the relatively long wiring pattern placed on the soldering surface is obstructed by the electronic components. is avoided.

Further, when branching the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, one of the branched wiring patterns is formed on the solder surface and the other is formed on the mounting surface through the through holes. One wiring pattern of the branch destination is detoured, and the one wiring pattern of the branch destination and the other wiring pattern do not cross each other on the same plane.

FIG. 30-4 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in the present embodiment in which the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted.

As shown in FIG. 30-4, electronic components such as the aforementioned game control microcomputer, input circuit, and output circuit are mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board. These electronic components include electronic components having one or more terminal rows each composed of a plurality of terminals arranged in one direction. Most of the electronic components having these terminal rows are arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, in the horizontal direction. As mentioned above, on the mounting surface, there is a large percentage of wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction, and electronic components with terminal rows are often arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, arranged in the horizontal direction. By doing so, it is possible to directly connect the wiring pattern extending in the vertical direction to the terminal rows arranged in the horizontal direction without changing the direction of the wiring pattern.

30-4, the input circuit and the output circuit among the electronic components having a terminal row are formed in a rectangular shape and provided with a recessed notch on one of the short sides, and on the surface The model number is printed so that the orientation of the part can be specified by the orientation of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. As shown in FIG. 30-4, the input circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the left side in FIG. 30-4 and the model number is printed from left to right. 30-4, the notch faces right and the model number is printed from right to left. It is possible to specify whether the circuit is present or whether it is an output circuit.

FIG. 30-5 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern which branched.

The game control board is formed with a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit as described above. . The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction formed on the solder surface, and as shown in FIG. It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend laterally toward the right side from through holes to which terminals of a game control microcomputer mounted on the left side are connected. As shown in FIG. 30-6, the data bus, input circuits, output circuits, and other electronic components are connected to a wiring pattern formed so as to branch out to the mounting surface side through through holes and extend vertically in the vertical direction. connected by

When connecting the game control microcomputer and electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits separated in the horizontal direction through the data bus, first, the terminals of the game control microcomputer extend in the horizontal direction. It is connected to a data bus on the surface, branches to a wiring pattern on the mounting surface side extending vertically toward the electronic component through a through hole at a position where the electronic component is mounted, and is connected to the electronic component. Therefore, it is not necessary to bypass the wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and it is possible to efficiently connect the game control microcomputer and the electronic parts separated in the horizontal direction. In addition, since the wiring pattern forming the data bus is formed on the solder surface on which electronic components are not mounted, the data bus is less likely to be affected by noise from the electronic components. Since the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the hole is used for connection, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is shortened, and the influence of noise from the electronic components during this period is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 30-5, the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction forming the data bus are not formed in a straight line, but divided into a plurality of wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction. The length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) is an antenna that maximizes resonance according to the bus clock (frequency used when transmitting data on the data bus) when transmitting data on the data bus. It is formed shorter than the length (λ (bus clock)/2). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring pattern forming the data bus from having an antenna length corresponding to the bus clock and unintentionally emitting radio waves due to resonance. Furthermore, even if the length of the antenna is half the length corresponding to the bus clock, it may reflect off the surface of the substrate and cause strong resonance. The lengths (L1 to L8) are formed to a length that is not half the antenna length at which resonance is maximized according to the bus clock. Emission of radio waves is also prevented.

In addition, the bus clock varies depending on the game control microcomputer and the oscillator to be installed, but the length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) depends on the bus clock, which is the maximum frequency assumed among them. The length of the antenna is shorter than the length of the antenna that maximizes resonance, and the length of the antenna is less than half the length of the antenna that maximizes resonance according to the bus clock that has the maximum frequency. Therefore, even when data is transmitted with a bus clock frequency lower than the expected maximum frequency, unintended radio waves are prevented from being generated.

As shown in FIG. 30-5, a plurality of divided horizontal wiring patterns forming a data bus are arranged in an oblique right direction or an oblique left direction. They are connected across wiring patterns extending in different directions. Further, the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction and the wiring pattern in the oblique right direction or the oblique left direction are connected while being bent at an obtuse angle. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unintended emission of radio waves from the bent portion of the wiring pattern.

Also, as shown in FIG. 30-5, through holes (A to F shown in FIG. 30-5) provided on oblique wiring patterns that connect a plurality of divided horizontal wiring patterns are used for mounting. Wiring patterns on the surface side (wiring patterns connected to A to F shown in FIG. 30-6) are branched, and oblique wiring patterns that connect the divided horizontal wiring patterns to each other. are used to branch the wiring pattern that constitutes the data bus.

In addition, in the game control board in the first embodiment, in order to make the length of the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction shorter than the antenna length that maximizes resonance, the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns, and a plurality of In this configuration, the horizontal wiring patterns divided into two are connected to each other by oblique wiring patterns formed on the same soldering surface. In other words, horizontal wiring patterns are alternately formed on the soldering surface and the mounting surface so that the horizontal wiring pattern length is shorter than the antenna length at which resonance is maximized. Also good. In such a configuration, it is preferable to branch the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction at the point where the wiring pattern is switched from the soldering surface or the mounting surface to the other surface. , the wiring patterns forming the data bus can be branched without intersecting on the same plane.

Figure 30-7 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ground area formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, Figure 30-8 is formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the configuration of a ground area;

As shown in FIGS. 30-7 and 30-8, the ground area is formed over almost the entire area other than the area where the wiring pattern and the insulating area are formed on the mounting surface and soldering surface of the game control board. The ground area formed on the game control board comprises a first ground area and a second ground area electrically separated via an insulating area. In both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, the first ground area is formed in the left area of the game control board, and the second ground area is formed in the right area of the game control board.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-7, a wiring pattern that transmits a low voltage (Vcc (+5 V) in this embodiment) signal such as a game control microcomputer, an input circuit, an output circuit, etc. is connected. Electronic components (low-voltage components) are mounted on the left area where the first ground area is formed, and ground terminals of the low-voltage components are connected to the first ground area. On the other hand, electronic parts (high voltage parts) to which wiring patterns for transmitting high voltage (VLD (+24 V) in this embodiment) signals are connected, such as drive circuits for operating motors, solenoids, etc. It is mounted on the right area where two ground areas are formed, and the ground terminal of the high voltage component is connected to the second ground area. This prevents unintended reverse flow of current from the high voltage component to the low voltage component via the ground area. In addition, since the first ground area and the second ground area are formed on opposite side sides of the game control board, interference with each other is prevented even if a potential difference occurs temporarily.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-9, a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area. Even if a potential difference occurs temporarily, current is prevented from flowing from one ground area to the other ground area.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-7 and 30-8, an insulating region in which no wiring pattern is formed is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. The ground area and the second ground area are electrically separated. Further, the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the first ground region and the second ground region on the soldering surface are formed so as to overlap each other, and the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface are formed so as to overlap each other. Since the insulating region that separates the ground regions and the insulating region that separates the first ground region and the second ground region on the solder surface are also formed so as to overlap each other, from one surface of the mounting surface and the solder surface to the other surface Mutual interference is prevented even if a potential difference occurs temporarily.

30-10 is a diagram showing the configuration of the connector mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, FIG. 30-11 is a connector formed on the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment FIG. 30-12 is a diagram showing a peripheral wiring pattern, and FIG. 30-12 is a diagram showing a state in which the game control board in this embodiment is housed in the board case.

As shown in FIG. 30-10, the game control board has a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN7 mounted near the lower side of the mounting surface for connecting wires from the outside of the game control board. In the wiring from the game control board, there are a signal that triggers the lottery, a signal that changes the set value that defines the advantage for the player such as the probability of the lottery, and a signal that changes the set value. Wiring for inputting or outputting signals related to the degree of advantage in the game, such as signals, signals for displaying information advantageous to the player on an external display, wiring for inputting the detection signal of the error cancellation operation, backup power supply wiring as a supply line for

As shown in FIG. 30-10, the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 are not directly connected to the wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. -11, it is connected to a wiring pattern formed on the solder side, that is, the side opposite to the side on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-10, no wiring pattern is formed around the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface, and information about the connector such as the connector number is printed therearound. ing. The information printed around the mounting portions of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is not limited to the connector number, and may be configured to print the number of terminals, the direction of the connector, the connection destination, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 30-11, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the solder surface passes through the through holes at the end opposite to the side connected to the terminals, and the wiring on the mounting surface passes through. connected to the pattern. In particular, the through holes a to h shown in FIGS. 30-10 and 30-11 are through holes to which the terminals of electronic components are connected, and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals provided in the connectors CN1 to CN7 are It is provided at the place where it is first connected to the electronic component. Therefore, it is possible to connect from the solder surface to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface using the through holes for connecting to the electronic component.

As shown in FIGS. 30-12(A) and 30-12(B), the game control board is attached to the game machine while being accommodated in the board case. The substrate case can be sealed by a one-way screw, sealing seal, welding, or the like, and once sealed, it is difficult to open without leaving a trace. Therefore, by attaching the game control board to the game machine in a state where it is housed in the board case, it has a structure that prevents fraudulent use of the game control board.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 30-12 (A) and (B), the substrate case is provided with a covering portion that covers the area around the connectors CN1 to CN7 when the game control substrate is housed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-10, the wiring pattern is not formed in the area covered by the covering portion of the board case of the mounting surface of the game control board, and the wiring pattern is formed avoiding the area. there is The covering portion is provided with insertion holes having substantially the same shape as the connectors CN1 to CN7, and the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed to the outside through these insertion holes so that wiring from the outside can be connected.

Even when the game control board is housed in the board case in this way, since the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to wiring from the outside, a slight gap is generated around the connectors CN1 to CN7. are not directly connected to the wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted, and are not directly connected to the solder surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. It is designed to be connected to the wiring pattern formed on the opposite side, and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is short-circuited from the periphery of the portion where the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the substrate case. Fraudulent acts such as disconnection are prevented.

In addition, the periphery of the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface is covered by the covering portion of the board case, and the area covered by the covering portion includes wiring connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7. No wiring patterns including patterns are formed, and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals provided in the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to the wiring patterns on the mounting surface in areas other than the covering portion, It is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7 from the periphery of the portions where the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the board case.

FIG. 30-13 is a circuit diagram relating to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 30-13, Vcc (+5V) is generated by the power board and connected to the power input terminal Vcc of the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board. In addition, Vcc (+5V) is branched from the line supplied to the game control microcomputer on the power supply board, and is connected to the charging capacitor through the backflow prevention diode, and the backflow prevention diode and the charging capacitor A line branched between is connected to the backup power supply input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer.

While the power is being supplied, Vcc (+5V) is supplied as a drive power source for the game control microcomputer, and the charging capacitor is charged. On the other hand, when the power supply is stopped, the supply of Vcc (+5V) is stopped, so that the backup power supply VBB charged in the charging capacitor is supplied to the game control microcomputer, The game control microcomputer is supplied with the backup power supply VBB so that the data stored in the RAM of the game control microcomputer is retained. In this embodiment, the backup power supply is configured to be supplied from a power supply board outside the game control board, but may be configured to be supplied from a circuit provided within the game control board.

30-14 is a diagram showing a wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-15 is formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the wiring pattern formed on the soldered surface and the wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface;

As shown in FIG. 30-14, on the soldering surface of the game control board, wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying normal power and wiring patterns VBB for supplying backup power are provided as wiring patterns constituting power supply lines. , are formed. The wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3, as shown in FIGS. 30-14 and 30-15, are configured by a wiring pattern formed on the solder surface and a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, and are mounted on the game control board. Connected to electronic components. On the other hand, the wiring pattern VBB, as shown in FIG. 30-14, consists only of wiring patterns formed on the solder surface. That is, the wiring pattern VBB is connected to the backup power input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer only through the wiring pattern formed on the soldering surface without being connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface. That is, the wiring pattern VBB supplied with the backup power supply VBB from the power supply board is formed only on the solder surface. Therefore, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB is supplied does not need to detour the electronic parts mounted on the mounting surface, and the distance of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer can be shortened, so that noise from the outside can be reduced. This prevents the data stored in the RAM from being corrupted by noise.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-15, on the mounting surface, a solid ground is formed in the portion where the wiring pattern VBB is formed on the solder surface side. Therefore, the wiring pattern VBB on the solder surface side is less susceptible to noise because the solid ground formed on the mounting surface blocks noise. Further, as shown in FIG. 30-15, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB for supplying the backup power is closer to the mounting surface than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying the normal power. In the region corresponding to , the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side, especially the wiring pattern used for signal transmission, is formed at a position where there are few crossing points. Therefore, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied from the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side is suppressed as much as possible.

In the present embodiment, among the wiring patterns formed on the soldering surface, the wiring pattern VBB for supplying the backup power supply is located in the corresponding region on the mounting surface side rather than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying the normal power supply. is formed at a position where there are few intersections with the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side. For example, a wiring pattern that transmits a signal related to the player's profit is closer to the mounting surface than a wiring pattern that transmits a signal that is not directly related to the player's history, such as a signal for controlling output parts. In the corresponding area, the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side is formed at a position where there are few crossing points, so that the signal formed on the mounting surface side can be used for transmission. The influence of noise on the wiring pattern, through which the signal related to the profit of the player is transmitted from the wiring pattern, is suppressed as much as possible.

In addition, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern that transmits the reset signal to the game control microcomputer and the wiring pattern that gives the operation clock to the game control microcomputer are relatively important. A place where a wiring pattern for signal transmission intersects a wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side in a corresponding region on the mounting surface side rather than a wiring pattern for transmitting other signals. By adopting a configuration in which the noise is reduced, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side and transmitting signals of relatively high importance is minimized. suppressed.

FIG. 30-16 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the game control board is attached to the slot machine. The slot machine is equipped with game parts related to games such as a liquid crystal display, an effect control board for controlling effects, a reel unit consisting of a plurality of reels, and a hopper unit for paying out medals. When the game control board is attached to the slot machine, the game control board has the mounting surface side, that is, the surface opposite to the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied is formed on the game component side. Mounted to be positioned. By adopting such a configuration, the influence of noise emitted from the game parts on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied can be suppressed.

FIG. 30-17 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the game control board is attached to the pachinko game machine. When the pachinko gaming machine is installed in a game arcade, it is often installed in such a manner that the back faces of other gaming machines such as other pachinko gaming machines face each other. When the game control board is attached to the pachinko game machine, the game control board has a mounting surface side, that is, a surface opposite to the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied is formed. It is attached so that it is arranged on the device side. By adopting such a configuration, the influence of noise emitted from other game machines on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied can be suppressed.

(Effect 1)
In the game control board of this embodiment, wiring patterns are formed on both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface has a ratio of the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (vertical direction). The ratio of the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) different from the first direction (horizontal direction) is higher than that of the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction). direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction) are concentrated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) are concentrated on the soldering surface. When the wiring pattern extending in the (vertical direction) and the wiring pattern extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) intersect, design such as detouring the wiring pattern can be reduced as much as possible.

The game control board of this embodiment is a quadrilateral consisting of a pair of sides (left side and right side) extending in a first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of sides (upper side and lower side) extending in a second direction (horizontal direction). It is characterized by its shape. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern can be formed along the shape of the game control board without waste.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that an electronic component having a terminal row consisting of a plurality of terminals is arranged so that the terminal rows are arranged in the second direction (horizontal direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (horizontal direction) can be directly connected to the electronic component.

The game control board of this embodiment includes a pair of short sides (left side and right side) extending in the first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of long sides (upper side and lower side) extending in the second direction (horizontal direction). It is characterized in that the electronic component is mounted only on the mounting surface and the electronic component is not mounted on the soldering surface. According to such a configuration, it is possible to form a wiring pattern in the second direction (horizontal direction), in which the distance can be long on the solder surface, without being obstructed by the electronic component.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the wiring pattern includes a wiring pattern branching from one wiring pattern to two wiring patterns, one of the two wiring patterns at the branch destination is formed on the mounting surface, The other wiring pattern is characterized in that it is formed on the solder surface. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to detour one of the wiring patterns at the branch destination, or to cross the one wiring pattern at the branch destination with the other wiring pattern on the same plane. can be formed.

(Effect 2)
The game control board of the present embodiment connects the first terminal (terminal of the game control microcomputer) and the second terminal (terminal of the input circuit, output circuit) separated in a specific direction (horizontal direction), and a specific signal ( A specific wiring pattern (data bus) used for transmitting input data and output data) is formed, and the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is formed of a plurality of wiring patterns consisting of straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction). Each linear wiring pattern formed by division and extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) has a specific length (λ/2), which is an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of a specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized by being formed shorter than According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns each composed of a straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction), and a straight line extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) is formed. Each wiring pattern is formed shorter than a specific length (λ/2), which is an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of a specific signal (input data, output data), so that the specific wiring pattern (data bus ) can be prevented from having an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data), and unintended radio waves can be prevented from being emitted.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are connected by wiring patterns extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (horizontal direction). . According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) with a simple structure.

In addition, the game control board of the present embodiment has a configuration in which straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are connected by a wiring pattern extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (horizontal direction). Alternatively, wiring patterns may be formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) may be alternately formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. Also in such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) with a simple structure.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is different from the specific wiring pattern (data bus) between one wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) and the other wiring pattern. It is characterized by branching into According to such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be preferably branched by utilizing the space between one wiring pattern extending in the specific direction and another wiring pattern.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) has an antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency (maximum frequency assumed as a bus clock) of each specific signal (input data, output data) It is characterized in that it is formed shorter than a specific length (λ/2). According to such a configuration, since the length of the straight wiring pattern extending in the specific direction (horizontal direction) is shorter than the antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency of the specific signal (input data, output data), It is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted even if a signal is transmitted by

In the game control board of this embodiment, the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction has a specific length (λ/2), which is the antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized in that the length is not 1/2 (λ/4). According to such a configuration, the straight wiring pattern extending in the specific direction (horizontal direction) is 1/2 of the specific length (λ/2), and strong resonance occurs due to reflection from the surface of the substrate. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unintended emission of radio waves.

(Effect 3)
The game control board of the present embodiment includes a first electronic component (low voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of a first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is connected, and a second voltage (VDL (+24V)). A second electronic component (high-voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of is connected is mounted, the first electronic component (low-voltage component) is connected to the first ground area, and the second electronic component ( The high voltage component) is characterized by being connected to a second ground area separated from the first ground area by an insulator. According to such a configuration, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern through which the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5V) is transmitted) is connected is connected to the first ground area, and the second voltage is A second electronic component (high-voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of (VDL (+24V)) is connected is connected to a second ground region separated from the first ground region by an insulating portion (insulating region). Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unintended reverse flow of current through the ground.

In addition, in the game control board of the present embodiment, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is connected is connected to the first ground area, A second electronic component (high-voltage component), to which a wiring pattern that transmits a signal of a second voltage (VDL (+24 V)) is connected, is connected to a second ground region separated from the first ground region by an insulating portion. Regarding the configuration, in a configuration in which there is a large difference in the current flowing through the wiring pattern that connects the first electronic component and the second electronic component, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground area, and the second electronic component is connected to the first ground area. It may be configured to be connected to a second ground region separated from the first ground region by an insulating portion. Even if the current difference between the patterns is large, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground area and the second electronic component is connected to the second ground area, so that an unintended reverse current flows through the ground. can be prevented.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a current from flowing from one ground area to the other ground area even if a potential difference occurs temporarily between the first ground area and the second ground area due to the capacitor. .

In the game control board of the present embodiment, a first ground area is formed on one side (left side), a second ground area is formed on the other side (right side) opposite to one side, and a first electronic component (low voltage component ) is mounted in the first ground area, and the second electronic component (high voltage component) is mounted in the second ground area. According to such a configuration, since the first ground area and the second ground area are formed on the opposite sides of the game control board, they can be prevented from interfering with each other even if a potential difference occurs temporarily.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) in which no wiring pattern is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area is formed on both the mounting surface and the solder surface. is characterized by With such a configuration, the insulation between the first ground region and the second ground region can be enhanced.

In addition, the game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on both the mounting surface and the solder surface. Even in a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on at least one of the mounting surface and the solder surface, the first ground area and the Insulation between the second ground regions can be enhanced.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the first ground area and the second ground area on the mounting surface and the first ground area and the second ground area on the solder surface are formed in areas corresponding to each other. and the non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) of the solder surface are also formed in corresponding areas. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent mutual interference even if a potential difference is temporarily generated from one surface of the mounting surface and the solder surface to the other surface.

(Effect 4)
The game control board of this embodiment is attached to the game machine while being housed in the board case, and connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) for attaching wiring from the outside of the game control board are mounted on the mounting surface. The terminals of (connectors CN1 to CN7) are characterized in that they are connected to wiring patterns formed on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected not to the mounting surface on which the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are mounted, but to the wiring pattern formed on the opposite solder surface. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnection of wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from the periphery where the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are exposed from the board case.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring connected to the connector (connectors CN1 to CN7) is connected to the wiring related to the advantage of the game (signal for changing the setting value to a changeable state, changing the setting value (wiring for inputting or outputting signals for displaying information advantageous to the player on an external display). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent cheating related to game advantage.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that information (connector number) on the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is displayed around the mounting portions of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. According to such a configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected to wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, and wiring patterns are formed around the mounting portions of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. Since the wiring pattern is not formed, by displaying information (connector number) on the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) in this portion, the portion where the wiring pattern is not formed on the mounting surface can be effectively used.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the board case has a covering portion covering the area around the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7), and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are: It is characterized in that it is formed on the solder surface in the region covered by the covering portion. With such a configuration, wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are not formed on the mounting surface even in the periphery of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7). (Connectors CN1 to CN7) can be reliably prevented from fraudulent actions such as short-circuiting or disconnection of wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from the exposed portions.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface at the point where it is first connected to the electronic component. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to connect to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface using the through holes for connecting to the electronic component.

(Effect 5)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components including a game control microcomputer having storage means (RAM) are mounted on the mounting surface, and no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface. The microcomputer for is capable of holding the stored contents of the storage means (RAM) by a specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) supplied by the wiring pattern, and the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) is a game control microcomputer The wiring pattern (VBB) to be supplied to is characterized in that it is formed only on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, since the wiring pattern that supplies the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is formed only on the solder surface on which electronic components are not mounted, it bypasses the electronic components. Since the distance of the wiring pattern can be shortened, it is difficult to receive noise from the outside, and it is possible to prevent the data stored in the storage means (RAM) from being damaged by the noise.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the mounting surface side is attached so as to be placed on the side of the game components (liquid crystal display, effect control board for controlling effects, etc.) related to the game. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise emitted from the game parts on the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that it is attached so that the mounting surface side is arranged on the other game device (another game machine) side. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer from the influence of noise emitted from other game machines.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the area on the mounting surface side corresponding to the area provided with the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer on the solder surface is solid. A ground is formed. According to such a configuration, noise from the mounting surface side can be blocked by the solid ground formed on the mounting surface.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies a specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is more It is characterized in that there are few intersections with the wiring pattern for transmitting signals in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from the wiring pattern for transmitting signals on the mounting surface side as much as possible.

Embodiment 1 of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. It goes without saying that

For example, in the present embodiment, an example in which the configuration according to the present invention is applied to a game control board for controlling a game has been described. The configuration according to the present invention may also be applied to a board for controlling game media and the provision of game values, a board for relaying between boards, and the like.

The structure of the game control board in Example 2 will be described. As in the first embodiment, the game control board has electronic parts mounted on one side, no electronic parts mounted on the other side, and terminals of the electronic parts are soldered. The configuration of the game control board in the second embodiment is basically the same as the configuration of the game control board in the first embodiment, and here, mainly the configuration different from the game control board in the first embodiment will be described. .

30-18 is a view showing the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1, and FIG. 30-19 is a view showing the soldering surface of the game control board in this example.

As shown in FIGS. 30-18 and 30-19, the game control board has a rectangular shape consisting of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and has an insulating printed board. Consists of A plurality of through holes are formed in the game control board, and a plurality of wiring patterns are formed in the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board so as to appropriately connect the through holes. In addition, an insulating area and a ground area are formed in the area where the wiring pattern of the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board is not formed.

Also in the game control board in the second embodiment, similarly to the game control board in the first embodiment, an input circuit and an output circuit are mounted. A concave notch is provided on one side, and the model number is printed on the surface, so that the orientation of the part can be specified by the direction of the notch and the direction of printing the model number. The input circuit is arranged so that the cutout is on the left side in the figure and the model number is printed from left to right, while the output circuit is arranged so that the cutout is on the right side in the figure and the model number is printed. It is arranged so that the printing direction is from right to left, and it is possible to identify whether these electronic components are input circuits or output circuits by the position of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. there is

FIG. 30-20 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern which branched.

The game control board is formed with a data bus that is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction formed on the solder surface, and as shown in FIGS. It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend laterally toward the right side from through holes to which terminals of a game control microcomputer mounted on the left side are connected. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the data bus, the input circuit and the output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern formed to branch to the mounting surface side through the through hole and extend vertically in the vertical direction. .

When connecting the game control microcomputer and the laterally separated input and output circuits via the data bus, first, the terminal of the game control microcomputer extends in the lateral direction on the data bus on the solder surface. at the position where the input circuit or output circuit is mounted, branch to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side extending in the vertical direction toward the input circuit or output circuit through the through hole, and connect to the input circuit or output circuit becomes. Therefore, there is no need to bypass the wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and the game control microcomputer can be efficiently connected to the laterally separated input and output circuits. In addition, since the wiring pattern forming the data bus is formed on the solder surface on which electronic components are not mounted, the data bus is less susceptible to noise from the electronic components. are connected by wiring patterns branched to the mounting surface side through through-holes, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is shortened and is less susceptible to noise from the electronic components during this period.

Also, as shown in FIG. 30-22, the data bus is connected to the noise elimination circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than any input circuit or output circuit connected to the data bus. This makes it difficult for noise on the data bus to affect the game control microcomputer.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-20, on the game control board, connectors CN10 to CN17 for connecting wires from the outside of the game control board are mounted in the vicinity of the upper side in the figure, and a data bus is installed. The wiring pattern is formed in an area near the lower side of the game control board in the figure, that is, in an area near the other side opposite to the one side on which the connectors CN10 to CN17 are mounted. For this reason, a wide area for mounting electronic parts such as input circuits and output circuits is ensured between the data bus and the connectors CN10 to CN17 for signal input/output with electronic parts outside the game control board. It's becoming

As shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, the game control board has an input signal from the first input component, which has relatively low importance among the input components used for game control (not triggering the lottery). A first input circuit that detects the input of a sensor or switch detection signal, etc.), an input signal from a second input component that is more important than the first input component (sensor or switch detection signal that triggers the lottery, an advantageous A second input circuit that detects input such as a detection signal that changes the set value that defines the speed, based on the output data from the game control microcomputer, the operation of the movable parts such as solenoids and motors according to the progress of the game A first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that performs the second output that displays according to the progress of the game, such as various indicators and LEDs, based on the output data from the game control microcomputer A second output circuit that outputs output signals to parts, based on the output data from the game control microcomputer, is mounted on the game control board, and the payout rate when playing the game for a certain period of time, etc. A third output circuit is implemented for outputting an output signal to a performance indicator for displaying performance.

A first output circuit, a first output circuit, a second output circuit, and a third output circuit among these input circuits and output circuits are connected to a data bus, and transmission of input data and transmission of output data are performed via the data bus. is done.

As shown in FIG. 30-20, the wiring pattern that constitutes the data bus connected to the terminal of the game control microcomputer on the solder surface branches to the mounting surface side through through holes at multiple points, and is vertically mounted on the mounting surface. It is connected to the wiring pattern formed in the direction. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole at the position M in the figure is connected to the terminal of the first input circuit. Further, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface through the through hole at the position N in the figure is connected to the terminal of the third output circuit. Wiring patterns branched to the mounting surface through through holes at positions O and P in the figure are connected to the terminals of the first output circuit. Further, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side connected through the through hole at the position Q in the drawing is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit and branches on the mounting surface. The remaining wiring pattern is connected to the wiring pattern on the solder side once through the through hole at the position R in the figure, and is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting side through the through hole again at the position S in the figure. and connected to the external output terminal.

As shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, the input circuit of the input circuit and output circuit connected by a shared data bus has a wiring pattern length from the output circuit to the game control microcomputer. It is connected to the data bus so that it is short. Therefore, the input data used for game control is less susceptible to noise and the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, among a plurality of output circuits connected by a shared data bus, an output signal is output to a first output component that operates a movable portion according to the progress of the game. has a shorter wiring pattern length to the game control microcomputer than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that displays according to the progress of the game. are connected to the data bus so that Therefore, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like, which affects the operation of the movable portion according to the progress of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, among the plurality of output circuits connected by the shared data bus, the third output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance indicator is Data so that the length of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the display (second output component) that performs display according to the progress of the game Connected to a bus. For this reason, it is difficult to tamper with the contents of the performance display by arranging illegal parts or the like.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 30-21, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side, which is connected through a through-hole at the position Q in the drawing, from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the soldering surface side, changes according to the progress of the game. It is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that outputs, and branches on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern outputs the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device It is connected to an external output terminal for outputting to. In this way, by utilizing the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through holes from the data bus formed on the soldering surface, the wiring pattern is connected to the second output circuit in order to output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side. and the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device. Since it is not necessary to branch to the soldering surface side from the data bus formed on the mounting surface in order to branch to each wiring pattern connected to the wiring pattern, the wiring pattern is formed simply.

The wiring pattern on the mounting surface side, which is connected through a through hole from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the soldering surface side, outputs an output signal to a second output component that outputs according to the progress of the game. It may be configured such that it is connected to terminals of two output circuits, and branched on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern is connected to an output circuit for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. Even with such a configuration, it is desirable to use the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through-holes from the data bus formed on the soldering surface, so that the output corresponding to the progress of the game can be performed on the mounting surface side. By branching the wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the output circuit for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device, it is connected to a plurality of output circuits. Since it is not necessary to branch to the soldering surface side from the data bus formed on the mounting surface for branching to each wiring pattern, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

Among the input circuits, the second input circuit is not connected to the data bus and transmits input data directly to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the wiring pattern connected to the terminal of the game control microcomputer on the mounting surface is connected to the wiring pattern on the solder surface side through the through hole once at the position of T in the figure, U in the figure It is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side again through the through hole at the position of , and is connected to the terminal of the second input circuit.

Thus, the first input circuit for detecting the input of the input signal from the first input component, which is relatively less important among the input components used for game control, communicates with the game control microcomputer via the data bus. A second input circuit that is connected but detects input of an input signal from a second input component having higher importance than the first input component is not connected to the data bus and is directly connected without going through the data bus. It is designed to be connected to a game control microcomputer, and the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is transmitted through the data bus through which the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since it is transmitted to the game control microcomputer without intermediary, the input data based on the important input signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by the input data from other input circuits or the output data to the output circuit. It will be transmitted.

(Effect 6)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit. According to such a configuration, the input circuit for transmitting the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component (input component) used for the control of the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer, the game control microcomputer Since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit that outputs the output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the input Data can be prevented from being affected by noise or the like.

The game control board of this embodiment is configured such that the input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit. It may be configured to be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than, and with such a configuration, based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer An output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) transmits input data based on an input signal from an electronic component (input component) used to control the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer. Since the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the input circuit, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. a first output circuit for outputting an output signal to a first output component that operates a movable portion according to the progress of a game based on output data transmitted from a game control microcomputer; a second output circuit for outputting an output signal to a second output component that displays according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer, the first output circuit comprising: It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit. According to such a configuration, the first output circuit that outputs the output signal to the first output component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game outputs the second output that displays according to the progress of the game. Since the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the part, the output data is affected by noise etc. It is possible to prevent the operation of the movable part according to the progress from being affected.

In addition, the game control board of the present embodiment is configured such that the first output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit. The output circuit may be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the first output circuit. A second output circuit that outputs an output signal to a second output component that performs display, and a first output circuit that outputs an output signal to a first output component that operates a movable portion according to the progress of a game. Also, since the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so as to be short, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise, etc., and affecting the display according to the progress of the game. can.

Also, like the game control board of the first embodiment, a first ground area where low voltage components are mounted is formed on the left side where the game control microcomputer is arranged, and a first ground area where high voltage components are mounted on the right side. When two ground areas are formed, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game often belongs to the high voltage component. The second output circuit, which is mounted in the second ground area and outputs an output signal to the second output part that displays according to the progress of the game, is often mounted in the first ground area because it belongs to the low voltage parts. The Rukoto. In such a configuration, the second output circuit is configured to be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the first output circuit, and the second output circuit is connected to the first ground. By mounting the second output circuit in the area, it is not necessary to mount the second output circuit, which is a low-voltage component, in the second ground area together with the first output circuit, which is a high-voltage component, thereby preventing a load from being applied to the second output circuit. can.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. Electronic parts are mounted only on the mounting surface, and a data bus is formed on the soldering surface, and the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected from the data bus through through holes is used to output output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface. The wiring pattern is branched into a wiring pattern connected to a second output circuit for playing the game and a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. According to such a configuration, the second output for outputting according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side using the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through holes from the data bus formed on the solder surface. Since the wiring pattern connected to the circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device are branched, in order to branch to each of these wiring patterns Since there is no need to branch from the data bus formed on the soldering surface to the mounting surface side, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. A first input circuit for transmitting input data based on an input signal from a first input component used for controlling the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer, and a first input circuit used for controlling the game control microcomputer A second input circuit that transmits input data based on the input signal from the 2 input components to the game control microcomputer, and a first output component and a second output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer It includes a first output circuit and a second output circuit that output an output signal, and the first input circuit, the first output circuit and the second output circuit are connected to a game control microcomputer via a data bus. , the second input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to a game control microcomputer without a data bus. According to such a configuration, the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is used for game control without passing through the data bus through which the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since it is transmitted to the microcomputer, the input data based on the important input signal can be transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by the input data from other input circuits or the output data to the output circuit. .

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface and a data bus is formed on the solder surface. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the data bus from being affected by noise from electronic components.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus, the input circuit and the output circuit are connected to each other by a branched wiring pattern on the mounting surface opposite to the soldering surface on which the data bus is formed through through-holes. and According to such a configuration, since the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, the influence of noise can be reduced.

In the game control board of this embodiment, connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from the outside of the board are mounted near one side (upper side), and the data bus faces one side of the game control board. It is characterized in that it is formed in a region closer to the other side (lower side) than the other side. According to such a configuration, an area for mounting electronic components such as an input circuit and an output circuit can be secured between the connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) and the data bus, so that the substrate area can be effectively utilized. .

In the game control board of this embodiment, a performance indicator for displaying the performance of the gaming machine is mounted, and the third output circuit for outputting an output signal to the performance indicator outputs an output signal to another indicator. It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output second output circuit. According to such a configuration, the third output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance display device, the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the other display device to the game control microcomputer Since the wiring pattern is short, it is possible to make it difficult to modify display contents by arranging illegal parts.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted so that the component orientations are different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus is connected to the noise elimination circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than the input circuit and the output circuit. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the game control microcomputer.

Although the second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this second embodiment, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Also, the same or similar configuration as the first embodiment has the same effects as those described in the first embodiment. Further, the modified example exemplified for the first embodiment can also be applied to the second embodiment.

The structure of the game control board in Example 3 will be described. As in the first and second embodiments, the game control board has electronic parts mounted on one side, no electronic parts mounted on the other side, and terminals of the electronic parts are soldered. It should be noted that the game control board in Example 3 is characterized by the structure of the mounted electronic components and the through holes, and here, the structure of the electronic components and the through holes will be described.

30-23 are perspective views showing the structure of the specific electronic component mounted on the game control board in Example 3, (A) is a perspective view from above of the specific electronic component, and (B) is a , and a perspective view from below of the specific electronic component.

The specified electronic component is a relatively large electronic component such as a key switch, and below the specified electronic component, as shown in FIGS. For the purpose, fixing terminals 1 and 2 that are not used to propagate signals and power of the specific electronic component, connection terminals that are connected to the wiring pattern of the substrate and are used to propagate signals and power of the specific electronic component, is provided. Moreover, the model number of the specific electronic component is stamped or printed above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 on the side surface of the specific electronic component.

In this embodiment, a key switch having both a fixing terminal and a connection terminal is exemplified as the specific electronic component, but other electronic components may be applied as the specific electronic component. An electronic component having only connection terminals without fixing terminals may be applied as the specific electronic component.

The through-holes provided in the game control board consist of normal through-holes and specific through-holes. As shown in Fig. 30-24(A), a normal through-hole is plated with copper, which is a conductor, from the solder surface to the inner peripheral surface of the through-hole. It is a through hole that conducts with On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-24(B), a specific through-hole is a through-hole in which the inner peripheral surface of the through-hole is not copper-plated and the through-hole does not conduct between the mounting surface and the soldering surface. be.

Normally, when soldering to the through-hole from the soldering surface side, as shown in Fig. 30-24(A), since the inside of the through-hole is copper-plated, the solder inside the through-hole does not reach the mounting surface. Although it will flow up, when soldering to a specific through hole from the soldering surface side, as shown in FIG. The solder does not flow up and the solder does not reach the mounting surface.

In this embodiment, the specific electronic component is fixed by inserting the fixing terminals 1 and 2 through the specific through holes, inserting the connection terminals through the normal through holes, and soldering them from the solder surface side.

In this way, the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are inserted through the specific through holes and fixed by soldering from the soldering surface side, so that the solder does not reach the mounting surface. It is possible to prevent troubles such as the model number printed or stamped above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 being hidden by the solder due to excessive rise to the mounting surface side where the component is mounted.

In particular, if the model number is hidden by solder, even if the part is illegally replaced, there is a risk that it will not be discovered. Also, if the model number is hidden in the model test, it will not be possible to specify the component configuration, and the test will not be approved. There is a risk that the terminal will not be able to receive the terminal, or that installation at the amusement arcade will not be approved because the model number cannot be confirmed at the time of installation at the amusement arcade. Such a problem can be prevented by fixing with .

On the other hand, since the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are terminals that are not used for transmitting signals or electric power of specific electronic components, problems arise even if the electrical connection is weakened when they are soldered to the specific through-holes. never On the other hand, the connection terminals are usually inserted through the through-holes and fixed by soldering from the solder surface side, so that the solder reaches the mounting surface to ensure electrical connection.

(Effect 7)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface of the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. A specific through-hole is formed in which a specific electronic component among a plurality of electronic components is fixed by inserting a terminal into the through-hole penetrating the surface and the soldering surface and soldering the through-hole and the terminal, The specific through-hole is characterized in that the solder surface of the mounting surface does not conduct and the solder does not reach the mounting surface when the terminal of the specific electronic component is soldered from the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the specific through-hole does not allow electrical continuity between the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and when the terminal of the specific electronic component is soldered from the soldering surface, the solder does not reach the mounting surface. In this case, it is possible to prevent the solder from rising too much toward the mounting surface on which the electronic component is mounted and causing a problem.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the terminals for fixing the specific electronic parts (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are inserted into the specific through holes and soldered. According to such a configuration, the specific through-holes are soldered to the specific through-holes for fixing the specific electronic component (fixing terminals 1 and 2), so that the solder reaches the mounting surface. By not doing so, problems do not occur even if the electrical connection becomes weak.

In addition, the game control board of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2) for fixing the specific electronic parts are inserted into the specific through holes and soldered. Terminals (connecting terminals) that propagate signals and power of components may be inserted and soldered. It is possible to prevent problems caused by short-circuiting of a terminal that propagates a signal or power of a specific electronic component with another terminal.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the model number of the specific electronic component is displayed (printed or stamped) above the terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the model number of the specific electronic part from being hidden due to excessive solder rising to the mounting surface side where the electronic component is mounted.

Although the third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this third embodiment, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. In addition, the same or similar configurations as those of the first and second embodiments have the same effects as those described in the first and second embodiments. Moreover, the modifications illustrated in the first and second embodiments are also applicable to the third embodiment.

(Invention of characteristic part 053SG)
As described above, the characteristic portion 053SG includes the following inventions. That is, conventionally, for example, as described in JP-A-2016-93428, etc., game machines such as pachinko game machines and slot machines generally have a board on which electronic devices are mounted, A substrate of this type has been proposed in which data is input/output using a single data bus between control means such as a CPU and other electronic equipment. In this type of substrate, there are various problems regarding the design of wiring patterns. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine in which the wiring pattern of the board is preferably formed, the game machine of (1) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the output circuit.
According to this feature, the input circuit that transmits input data based on the input signal from the electronic component used for controlling the control means to the control means outputs to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means. Since the data bus is connected so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the output circuit for outputting the signal, it is possible to prevent the input data from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine of (2) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to (1),
The board (game control board) is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from electronic components on the data bus.

The gaming machine of (3) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit are connected through a through-hole to a surface (mounting surface) opposite to the surface on which the data bus is formed (solder surface) by a branched wiring pattern. Characterized by
According to this feature, since the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, the influence of noise can be reduced.
The gaming machine of (4) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
Connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from the outside of the board are mounted near one side (upper side) of the board (game control board), and the data bus is connected to the board (game control board). It is characterized in that it is formed in a region near the other side (lower side) facing the one side of the control board).
According to this feature, since an area for mounting electronic components such as an input circuit and an output circuit can be secured between the connector and the data bus, the board area can be effectively utilized.

The gaming machine of (5) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4),
A performance indicator for displaying the performance of the game machine is mounted on the board (game control board),
The output circuit (third output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the performance indicator is more likely than the output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to another indicator. (microcomputer) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern is short.
According to this feature, the output circuit for outputting the output signal to the performance indicator has a shorter wiring pattern to the control means than the output circuit for outputting the output signal to the other indicators. It is possible to make it difficult to illegally alter the display content by arranging the

The gaming machine of (6) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5),
It is characterized in that the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted on the substrate so that the component directions are different.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily grasp the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit.

The gaming machine of (7) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6),
The data bus is connected to the noise elimination circuit at a position closer to the control means (game control microcomputer) than the input circuit and the output circuit.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the control means.

The game machine of (8) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The output circuit outputs to the first electronic component (first output component) that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) A first output circuit (first output circuit) for outputting a signal, and a second electronic component (second a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the second output component),
The first output circuit (first output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the second output circuit (second output circuit) It is characterized by being
According to this feature, the first output circuit that outputs the output signal to the first electronic component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game is connected to the second electronic component that displays the display according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since the wiring pattern to the control means is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal, the output data is affected by noise etc. It is possible to prevent the operation of the unit from being affected.

The game machine of (9) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The board (game control board) has electronic components mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface), and is connected from the data bus through through holes. The first wiring pattern (wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit) for outputting the wiring pattern on the first surface (mounting surface) according to the progress of the game on the first surface (mounting surface). and a second wiring pattern (wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal) for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device.
According to this feature, the wiring pattern on the first surface connected to the data bus formed on the second surface through the through-hole is used to output the output according to the progress of the game on the first surface side. Since the output signal corresponding to the wiring pattern and the progress of the game is branched to the second wiring pattern for outputting to the external device, it is formed on the second surface to branch to the first wiring pattern and the second wiring pattern respectively. Since there is no need to branch from the data bus to the first surface side, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

The game machine of (10) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
A first input for transmitting input data based on an input signal from a first electronic component (first input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from a circuit (first input circuit) and a second electronic component (second input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) is input to the control means (game control A second input circuit (second input circuit) to be transmitted to a microcomputer), and a third electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) (first output component, second output an output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the component),
The first input circuit (first input circuit) and the output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) are connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) via the data bus,
The second input circuit (second input circuit) is connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) without passing through the data bus.
According to this feature, the input data based on the input signal from the second electronic component is transmitted to the control means without passing through the data bus through which the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Therefore, input data based on important input signals can be transmitted to the control means without being affected by input data from other input circuits or output data to the output circuit.

The game machine of (11) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the input circuit.
According to this feature, the output circuit for outputting an output signal to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means outputs the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component used for controlling the control means. Since the wiring pattern to the control means is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the input circuit for transmission to the control means, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like.

The game machine of (12) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The output circuit outputs to the first electronic component (first output component) that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) A first output circuit (first output circuit) for outputting a signal, and a second electronic component (second a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the second output component),
The second output circuit (second output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the first output circuit (first output circuit) It is characterized by being
According to this feature, the second output circuit for outputting an output signal to the second electronic component that performs display according to the progress of the game is connected to the first electronic component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since the wiring pattern to the control means is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the first output circuit for outputting the output signal, the output data is affected by noise and the like, so that the display corresponding to the progress of the game is displayed. can be prevented from affecting

In the above embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of balls circulated and lent out according to the player's request for lending and the number of prize balls awarded according to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine. Since scores and points are given to the player instead of game balls in these enclosed type game machines, the given scores and points correspond to game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. In addition, one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of individually identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines, slot machines, etc., in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Also, the gaming machine capable of playing a game is at least one that performs a game, and is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, and may be a general gaming machine.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if it is modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention.

Moreover, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. A storage portion (eg, ball tank forming portion 201) capable of storing game media (eg, game balls P), a payout portion (eg, payout device 200) capable of dispensing game media, and an upper surface of A guide passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage forming portion 202 or a second 2 guide passage forming portion 204), and a cover portion (for example, first cover body 310, second cover body 320, and third cover body 330) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion. , in the cover portion, a predetermined limit portion (for example, , long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, and recesses 336) are provided (see FIGS. 22 and 24), and the screw members dropped into the guide passage forming portion are fed to the dispensing portion. A plurality of specific restricting portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) for restricting the movement of is provided (see FIGS. 11, 12, and 27), and the predetermined restricting portion falls on the cover portion. A first retaining portion (for example, long holes 316A to 316C) and a second retaining portion (for example, a groove 326A to 326C), wherein the second retention portion is provided at a position closer to the dispensing portion (for example, dispensing device 200) than the first retention portion, and is larger than the first retention portion (L22B> L21), further, a light-emitting means capable of emitting light (eg, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, win-time flash lamp 135SG009F), and specific display corresponding to variable display (eg, hold display and active display), and a specific display effect (for example, , a part that displays a pending display or an active display in any one of the display patterns α to γ), and a specific light emission effect (for example, a winning flash effect) that causes the light emitting means to emit light. and an effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120), wherein the effect execution means is recognized by the player that the light emission of the light emitting means is emitted before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect. 40-28, FIGS. 40-29 (A) to 40-32 (H), FIGS. 40-49 (A) to 40-50 (D ), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on before the display of the pending display is completed), when the specific light emission effect is executed rather than when the specific light emission effect is not executed. is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-24, when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, it is controlled to the big win game state more than when the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed). high ratio), the light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (for example, winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, The first light emitting means includes an attacker lamp 9c and a movable body lamp 9d), and the first light emitting means is a first period from the start of the specific light emission effect to a predetermined timing (for example, after the first winning flash effect is started). a period until the end timing of the flash effect at the time of the first prize winning) and a second period from the predetermined timing to a specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, after the flash effect at the time of the second prize is started and the prize is won) During the period until the ready-to-win effect start timing of the variable display which is the object of the time flash effect), light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F During the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, it blinks with the brightness C1 and the period T1, and during the period of the flash effect at the time of the latter period, it blinks with the brightness C2 and the period T2). In the first period, light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect, and in the second period, light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-28, the main lamp 9a , the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink with the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, and with the brightness C2 and the period T0 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the second prize. The part that flashes at) gaming machines can be mentioned .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. Further, it is possible to prevent the threaded member that has entered the guide passage forming portion from entering the delivery portion. In addition, since the screw member tends to be retained in the retaining portion as it approaches the dispensing portion, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from moving and falling into the guide passage forming portion. In addition, since the light emitting means emits light before the completion of the display of the specific display, the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and during the first period of the specific light emission effect, the By causing not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous, so that the specific display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect. becomes even easier for the player to recognize.

In other words, it is possible to make the game machine less likely to break down by preventing the screw member from falling and being mixed in the guiding passage forming portion or the payout portion, and the light emission mode of the light emitting means is the target of the specific light emission effect. It is possible to make the game machine easy for the player to recognize the specific display. That is, it is possible to provide a game machine that is hard to break down when installed in a game arcade and whose effects are easy for the player to understand.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling and being mixed in the guide passage forming portion and the payout portion, and to make it easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect. , a game machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player; lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F), and display means capable of displaying specific displays (for example, pending display and active display) corresponding to variable display (for example, Based on the image display device 5) and the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, occurrence of start winning), a specific display effect for displaying the specific display (for example, a display pattern α to a display pattern γ and a specific light emitting effect (for example, a winning flash effect) that causes the light emitting means to emit light (for example, a performance control CPU 120), and The effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, FIG. 40- 28, as shown in FIGS. 40-29 (A) to 40-32 (H) and FIGS. 40-49 (A) to 40-50 (D), winning before the display of the pending display is completed The part that lights the hour flash lamp 135SG009F), the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, in FIG. 40-24 As shown, when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed), the light emitting means is the first light emitting means (for example, Winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d), and the first light emission The means comprises a first period from the start of the specific light emission effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term to the end timing of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term) and from the predetermined time. A specific type of variable display that is the target of the specific lighting effect In the second period until the timing (for example, the period from the start of the flash effect for the late winning to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display which is the object of the flash effect for the winning), light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 40-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the first winning flash effect, and part blinking at luminance C2 and period T2), the second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first period, and responds to the variable display being executed in the second period. (For example, as shown in FIG. 40-28, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d have the luminance C1 and the period A portion that blinks at T1 and blinks at a brightness of C2 and a period of T0 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the late winning).

(form)
The game machine of form A1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
Light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying specific displays (for example, pending display and active display) corresponding to variable display;
A specific display effect for displaying the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a portion in which a pending display or an active display is displayed in any one of the display patterns α to γ) , a specific display display start effect) and a specific light emission effect (for example, a winning flash effect) that causes the light emitting means to emit light (for example, effect control CPU 120);
with
The effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, FIG. 40). -28, Figures 40-29(A) to 40-32(H), Figures 40-49(A) to 40-50(D), from before completion of display of pending indication The part that lights the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning),
The ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-24, when the winning flash effect is executed) In the case of winning, the proportion of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning),
The light emitting means includes first light emitting means (for example, winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) and
The first light emitting means has a first period from the start of the specific light emission effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous winning flash effect). A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. period) in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has the brightness C1 and A part that flashes at cycle T1 and flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the late winning),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, FIGS. 40-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink at the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term, and the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term is executed. During the period, it is characterized by a portion that blinks at a brightness of C2 and a period of T0), @.
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the first period of the specific light emission effect. , not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means can emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, so that the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous. This makes it even easier for the player to recognize the specified display.

The gaming machine of form A2 is the gaming machine according to form A1,
The specific display effect is performed by an appearance effect unit (for example, FIGS. As shown in FIG. 40-50(D), the effect control CPU 120 executes the specific display display start effect execution processing, thereby displaying an appearance animation in which the pending display and the active display gradually appear from the bottom to the top. part), and a periodic effect section (for example, FIG. 40-15, FIG. 40-30 (D) to As shown in FIGS. 40-32(H), 40-49(B) to 40-50(D), the effect control CPU 120 executes a specific display rotation display effect execution process to display a pending display or an active display. The part where the display is displayed as a rotating animation) and
The timing at which the display of the specific display is completed is the timing at which the periodic effect is started (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part where the rotation animation of these pending display and active display starts)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the specific display.

The gaming machine of form A3 is the gaming machine according to form A1 or form A2,
The effect executing means can start the specific light emission effect before starting the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-29(A) to 40-32(H), the specific display When the display start effect B is executed, the win flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable flash lamp 135SG009F as the flash effect at the time of winning are displayed from the timing before the start of display of the pending display and the active display. The part where the body lamp 9d emits light)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the specific light emission effect is started before the start of the specific display effect, the specific light emission effect can be made more conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form A4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A3,
The specific display effect includes an appearance effect in which the specific display appears (for example, a specific display display start effect),
The display means displays the specific display in a plurality of different display modes (for example, a specific display display start effect A that only executes an appearance animation in which a pending display or an active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top, and a character A is the first display mode). After acting on the reserved memory display area 135SG005D and the active display area 135SG005A, it can be displayed in a specific display display start effect B) that executes an appearance animation in which the reserved display and the active display gradually appear from the bottom to the top,
The period of the appearance effect varies depending on the display mode of the specific display (for example, the specific display start effect A is 0.2 seconds, and the specific display start effect B is 1.2 seconds),
The specific light emission effect is started before the end timing of the shortest appearance effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-28 and 40-49 (A) to 40-50 (D) , The part where the flash effect at the time of winning starts before the end timing of the specific display display start effect A)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of the display mode of the specific display, the specific light emission effect can be started before the appearance effect ends, so that the player can reliably see the specific display targeted for the specific light emission effect. recognizable.

The gaming machine of form A5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A4,
The effect executing means once controls the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means to a low luminance state, and then starts the specific light emitting effect (for example, FIG. 40-28, FIG. 40-29 (A), FIG. As shown in 40-29(B), FIG. 40-49(A), and FIG. 40-49(B), when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the start winning, once the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on. , main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the start of the specific light emission effect.
It should be noted that the "low luminance state" in the present invention includes not only a state in which light is emitted at low luminance, but also a state in which light is not emitted.

The gaming machine of form A6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A5,
The effect execution means once controls the display means to a low visibility state, and then starts the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-11, when executing the flash effect at the time of winning, the image Part where the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is lowered by lowering the brightness of the backlight built into the display device 5, and then the flash effect at the time of winning is started)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the start of the specific light emission effect.
In addition, the "low visibility state" in the present invention is a state in which the visibility of the display means is lower than the previous state, and the visibility of the display is improved by a method other than lowering the brightness of the display means. Including degraded state.

The gaming machine of form A7 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A6,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, an advance notice effect) suggesting that the variable display is controlled to be in an advantageous state, and when the suggestive effect is being executed and when the suggestive effect is executed. is not executed (for example, FIGS. 40-29 (A) to 40-48 (n), FIGS. 40-49 (A) to 40-68 ( As shown in n), the part where the flash effect at the time of winning can be executed depending on whether the advance notice effect is being executed or not),
A variable display corresponding sound corresponding to the variable display (variable display corresponding sound shown in FIG. 40-28), a suggestive effect corresponding sound corresponding to the suggestive effect (notice effect corresponding sound shown in FIG. 40-29 (A)), A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting a specific light emission effect corresponding sound (a winning flash effect corresponding sound shown in FIG. 40-29 (B)) corresponding to the specific light emission effect,
The sound output means is
When the specific light emission effect is executed while the sound corresponding to the variable display is being output, the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be output with priority over the sound corresponding to the variable display being output (for example, As shown in FIG. 40-29(B), when the winning flash effect is executed during the execution of the variable display, the sound corresponding to the variable display is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, while the winning flash effect is supported. The part that outputs sound at volume V1 (V1>V2)),
When the specific light-emitting effect is executed while the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect is being output, the sound corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect can be output with priority over the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect being output (for example, As shown in FIG. 40-29(B), when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed during the execution of the notice effect, the sound corresponding to the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, while the flash effect at the time of winning is supported. Part that outputs sound at volume V1 (V1>V2))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the sound corresponding to the variable display or the sound corresponding to the suggestion effect is output, the sound corresponding to the specific light effect can be easily heard, and the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light effect enables the player to execute the specific light effect. easier to recognize.

The gaming machine of form A8 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A7,
Equipped with sound output means capable of outputting sound (for example, speakers 8L and 8R),
In the specific light emission effect, the effect executing means outputs a sound corresponding to the specific light effect from the sound output means before either the completion of display of the specific display or the light emission of the light emitting means (for example, FIGS. 40-28 , Figures 40-29 (A) ~ Figure 40-32 (H), Figures 40-49 (A) ~ Figure 40-50 (D), execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined according to the start winning. If this is the case, after the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect starts to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display completes)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by outputting the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect, the player can quickly recognize the establishment of the predetermined condition, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A7,
Equipped with sound output means capable of outputting sound (for example, speakers 8L and 8R),
The effect execution means, in the specific light emission effect,
A sound corresponding to a specific light emission effect can be output from the sound output means (for example, a portion capable of outputting a sound corresponding to a winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R),
The light emitting means is caused to emit light before the completion of the display of the specific display and the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-12, execution of flash effect at the time of winning in response to start winning) is determined, after the win flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the speaker 8L, 8R will output the sound corresponding to the win flash effect, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display will be completed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player quickly recognize the establishment of the predetermined condition by the light emission of the light emitting means, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A9,
In the specific light emitting effect, the first light emitting means emits light in a predetermined mode corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and the first light emitting means emits light more than the predetermined mode during the second period. It is an effect that emits light in a specific mode with a low degree (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first prize, the flash lamp 135SG009F for flash at the time of winning flashes at the brightness C1, and the flash effect at the time of winning 135SG009F During the execution period of the hour flash effect, the part that blinks the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 (C1>C2))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by causing at least the first light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined manner, the player can recognize the start of the specific light emitting effect, and the first light emitting means continues in the predetermined manner even during the second period. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of game interest due to hindrance to other performances due to light emission.
In addition, the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" in the present invention includes a low-speed blinking mode with a low degree of emphasis due to a slow blinking speed.

The gaming machine of form A11 is the gaming machine according to form A10,
The second period includes a period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is executed and a period during the execution of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, FIG. 40-28 , the execution period of the late winning flash effect is the period during which the variable display before the variable display targeted for the winning flash effect is executed, and the execution period of the variable display targeted for the winning flash effect. the part containing the period and
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first light emitting means emits light in a specific manner before and after the start of the variable display which is the target of the specific light emission effect, the player can easily recognize that the target is the variable display. Therefore, the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A12 is the gaming machine according to form A10 or form A11,
The first light emitting means emits light in the predetermined manner when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-13, the target of the winning flash effect is A portion that blinks the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F with a brightness of C1 and a period of T1 when a certain variable display is started)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A13 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A12,
The display means displays a specific light emission effect corresponding image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first display mode during the first period, and displays the specific light emission effect corresponding image in the first display mode during the second period. is also displayed in a second display mode with a low degree of emphasis (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first prize, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, and the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, During the execution period of the time flash effect, the part where the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by displaying the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first display mode on the display means in the first period, the player can be made to recognize the start of the specific light effect effect, and the image is displayed in the second period. By displaying the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the second display mode by the means, the display means continues to display the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first display mode, thereby obstructing other displays and increasing the interest in the game. You can prevent it from dropping.

The gaming machine of form A14 is the gaming machine according to form A13,
The display means displays the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in a first display mode when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-13, A portion for displaying an effect image 135SG005E in the image display device 5 when the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A15 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A14,
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting a specific light emission effect corresponding sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect,
The sound output means outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in a first output mode during the first period, and does not output the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect or has a higher intensity than the first output mode during the second period. Output in the second output mode with a low degree (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first period, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 During the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period, the part that outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 81 and 8R at a volume V2 (V1>V2)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by outputting the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first output mode, it becomes possible for the player to easily recognize that the specific light emission effect has started, and at the same time, the specific light effect effect is started. During the execution of , the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect is not output or is output in the second output mode, thereby suppressing the deterioration of the game interest due to the other effects being hindered by the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect. .

The gaming machine of form A16 is the gaming machine according to form A15,
The sound output means outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first output mode when the variable display that is the target of the specific light effect is started (for example, as shown in Modification 135SG-13 (2) a portion for outputting a sound corresponding to the winning flash effect at volume V1 from the speakers 8L and 8R when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect starts;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A17 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A16,
The first light emission means stops emitting light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 40-69 as a modification 135SG-1, the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation command during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the late winning, from the speakers 8L, 8R stop the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, turn off the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, hide the silhouette image 135SG005S in the image display device 5, clear the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning, etc. During the period, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S are not executed, and the first variable display start command is received. Based on this, by selecting the late winning flash effect process table and resetting and starting the process timer for the late winning flash effect process table, the late winning flash effect (flash at winning Output of sound corresponding to production, light emission of flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, display of silhouette image 135SG005S)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by temporarily stopping the light emission of the light emitting means, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly thinking that the variable display is continuing.

The gaming machine of form A18 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A17,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) in which a temporary stop is made until a display result is derived from the start of variable display, and then variable display is performed again,
The first light emitting means responds to the specific light emission effect during a temporary stop when the re-variable display effect is executed during the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 40-69, FIG. During the temporary stop period of the decoration pattern in the variable display executed before the variable display, the part where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to blink with the brightness C2 and the period T2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the variable display has ended despite the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of form A19 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A18,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) in which a variable display is temporarily stopped after a variable display is started and a display result is derived, and then the variable display is performed again,
The first light emitting means is
Even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect as the second period (for example, as modification 135SG-1, FIGS. 40-69 and 40-70 (A ) ~ as shown in Fig. 40-89(n), even during the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at the brightness C1 and the period T2),
Even in the temporary stop when the re-variable display effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, light emission is continued in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as a modification 135SG-1 As shown in FIGS. 40-69 and 40-70(A) to 40-89(n), during the temporary stop period of the variable display of the decorative pattern that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash The part where the lamp 135SG009F continues blinking with a brightness of C2 and a period of T2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the variable display has ended despite the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of form A20 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A16,
The first light emitting means continues light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 40-29(A) to 40-48(n), during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is started. During the previous variable display symbol fixing period, the part where the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F continues to blink),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light emission is continued during the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period, and the player's expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is the object of the specific light emission effect. The variable display can be accurately maintained until the start of the variable display, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A21 is the gaming machine according to form A20,
The display means can variably display the first effect identification information (for example, decoration pattern) and variably display the second effect identification information (for example, small pattern) having lower visibility than the first effect identification information. is a game machine,
During the result display period, the second effect identification information in a stopped state is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. is displayed when the is stopped),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if light emission continues during the result display period, the second effect identification information in the stopped state is displayed, so that the player can recognize that it is the result display period.

The gaming machine of form A22 is the gaming machine according to form A21,
The display means is capable of displaying the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the second period so as not to overlap the display of the second effect identification information (for example, FIG. 40-33 (J) , etc., during execution of the winning flash effect, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the image display device 5. 1 The part displayed at the left end of the display area 135SG005F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in recognizing the end of the variable display due to the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect overlapping the display of the second effect identification information.

The gaming machine of form A23 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A22,
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach) that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
When the specific effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect, the first light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect until the specific effect is started. When the effect is started, light emission is started in a manner corresponding to the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. In the display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is flashed at the brightness C2 and the period T2 before the start of the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is flashed at the brightness of C2 from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win. part to light up),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the specific performance is started, the light emitting means emits light in a mode corresponding to the specific performance instead of the mode corresponding to the specific lighting performance, so that the game amusement of the specific performance can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A24 is the gaming machine according to form A23,
The display means can display a specific effect start image corresponding to the start of the specific effect when the specific effect is started (for example, FIGS. 40-96 (K) to 40-98 (O) , as shown in FIGS. 40-104(K) to 40-106(O), a portion where the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white (white out)),
The first light emitting means enters a low-luminance state when the display of the display means is switched to the specific effect start image, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific effect after entering the low-luminance state (for example, FIG. As shown in 40-90, during the white-out period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on at the brightness C2 from the subsequent start timing of the reach effect of super reach). ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emission mode of the first light emission means changes across a low-luminance state that accompanies the switching to the specific effect start image, the change in the light emission mode does not make the player feel uncomfortable. Since it can be prevented, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A25 is the gaming machine according to form A23 or form A24,
A movable body (for example, movable body 32) is provided,
The effect executing means suggests, as the specific effect, an action effect to move the movable body at the start of the specific effect (for example, the movable body action effect shown in FIGS. 40 to 90) and execution of the action effect. A motion suggesting effect (for example, a movable body motion suggesting effect shown in FIGS. 40-90) can be executed,
The first light emitting means enters a low-luminance state when executing the action-suggestion effect, and after entering the low-luminance state, emits light in a mode corresponding to the action effect, which is a mode corresponding to the specific effect (for example, As shown in FIGS. 40-90, during the execution period of the movable body motion suggesting effect during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is extinguished, and the winning flash from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. The part that lights the lamp 135SG009F for the display with the brightness C2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emission mode of the first light emission means changes across the low-luminance state associated with the execution of the suggestive effect, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the change in the light emission mode. Since it can be done, a game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A26 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A25,
The first light emitting means is
When a special effect different from the specific light emission effect is executed by the effect execution means, light can be emitted in a manner corresponding to the special effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-108 (A) as modification 135SG-3 , when the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F can be lit in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect),
When the specific light emission effect is started during execution of the special effect, light is emitted in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect in preference to a mode corresponding to the special effect (for example, modification 135SG-3 As shown in FIG. 40-108(B), when the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the lamp for the flash at the time of winning in a manner corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning The part where the lighting (blinking) of 135SG009F continues),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect from being started at inappropriate timing such as the end timing of the special effect.

The gaming machine of form A27 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A26,
The light emission of the first light emitting means in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends at a first timing during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect and at a second timing after the first timing. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 40-119 (A) and 40-119 (B) as modification 135SG-4, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F corresponds to the winning flash effect The timing to end the lighting mode includes the timing to start the movable object action effect during variable display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, and the timing to start the ready-to-win effect of super reach).
When the light emission of the first light emitting means in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends at the first timing, and when the light emission of the first light emitting means in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends at the second timing The ratio of control to an advantageous state differs depending on when it ends (for example, as shown in FIG. The degree of expectation for a big hit in a case where the light emission mode is changed from the start timing of the movable body action production to the light emission mode according to the movable body action production and the case where the light emission mode is changed according to the ready-to-win production from the start timing of the ready-to-win production. are different),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing when the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A28 is the gaming machine according to form A27,
The effect executed by the effect execution means at the end of the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect is different between when the light emission ends at the first timing and when the light emission ends at the second timing. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 40-119 as a modified example 135SG-4, according to the timing of ending the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, during the execution period of the movable body operation effect There are cases where it is during the execution period of the reach production of super reach),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize whether the end timing is the first timing or the second timing.

The gaming machine of form A29 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A28,
The effect execution means provides a first effect (for example, a movable body motion effect shown in FIGS. 40-119 as modification 135SG-4) during variable display and a second effect (for example, modification 135SG) different from the first effect. -4 can execute the reach performance of super reach shown in FIG. 40-119,
The first light emitting means is
It is possible to change from light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to light emission in a mode according to the first effect in accordance with the execution of the first effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, As shown in FIG. 40-119(A) as a modified example 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect to the start timing of the movable body motion effect. The part that changes the light emission mode according to the action production),
With the execution of the second effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it is possible to change from light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect to light emission in a manner according to the second effect (for example, As shown in FIG. 40-119(B) as a modified example 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect to the light-emitting mode according to the ready-to-win effect),
When changing from light emission in a mode according to the specific light emission effect to light emission in a mode according to the first effect, and when light emission in a mode according to the specific light emission effect changes to light emission in a mode according to the second effect The ratio of control to an advantageous state differs depending on the time (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-119 (C) as modification 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed according to the winning flash effect. The degree of expectation for a big hit is different between a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body motion performance from the start timing of the movable body motion performance and a light emission mode corresponding to the ready-to-win performance from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect that is being executed when the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A30 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A28,
A movable body (for example, movable body 32) is provided,
The effect executing means controls an action effect to move the movable body (for example, a movable body action effect), an action suggestion effect to suggest execution of the action effect (for example, a movable body action suggestion effect), and an advantageous state. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, reach effect of super reach) that suggests that
The first light emitting means is
It is possible to change from a mode of light emission corresponding to the specific light emission effect to a mode corresponding to the action suggestion effect as the action suggestion effect is executed during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, a modification As shown in 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect to the lighting mode according to the movable body motion suggesting effect from the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect. part to change),
It is possible to change from light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to light emission in a mode according to the specific effect along with the execution of the specific effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, a modification As shown in 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emitting mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. ),
A rate of controlling to an advantageous state differs between when light emission changes from a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to a mode corresponding to the action suggesting effect and when light emission changes to a mode corresponding to the specific light effect (e.g. , as shown in modification 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is changed from the light emission mode according to the flash performance at the time of winning, from the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion performance to the movable body motion suggestion performance. A part where the expectation of a big hit is different between when the lighting mode is used and when the lighting mode is set according to the ready-to-win effect from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect that is being executed when the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A31 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A30,
The display mode of the specific display is a normal mode (eg, display pattern α), a special mode (eg, display pattern δ and display pattern ε shown in FIGS. 40-120 as modification 135SG-5) and a special mode (eg, display pattern β and display pattern γ),
The special mode includes a first special mode (e.g., display pattern γ) and a second special mode (e.g., display pattern β) different from the first special mode,
When the specific display is displayed in the first special mode, the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the second special mode (for example, FIG. 40-17 As shown in , when the pending display or active display is displayed in the display pattern γ, the portion that is controlled to the jackpot game state at a higher rate than when displayed in the display pattern β),
The specific display of the special mode can be changed to either the first special mode or the second special mode (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-120 as modification 135SG-5, the display pattern δ and A portion where the suspended display or active display displayed in the display pattern ε can be changed to the suspended display or active display in the display pattern β or γ),
When the specific display is displayed in the special mode, the ratio of execution of the specific light emission effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the special mode (for example, as modification 135SG-5, FIG. 40- As shown in 120, when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε, both the winning display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern β and the display pattern γ. The part where the flash effect is executed at a high rate),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the specific display is displayed in the special mode, the special mode is changed to the first special mode or the second special mode by executing the specific light emission effect at a high rate. It is possible to attract the player's attention to the game and improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of form A32 is the gaming machine according to form A31,
The special mode is a mode of a specific color (for example, blinking white as shown in FIGS. 40-120 as modification 135SG-5),
The special mode is a mode of a special color different from the specific color (for example, blue or red as shown in FIG. 40-17),
The normal aspect is an aspect of a color (for example, white) other than the specific color and the special color,
The specific display of the specific color has a higher rate of changing to the special color when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, modification 135SG-5 As shown in , when the pending display or the active display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, the display pattern of the specific display is displayed depending on whether or not the winning flash effect is being executed. part where the ratio of change to pattern β and display pattern γ is different),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the difference in the mode of the specific display can be easily recognized by the difference in color, and when the specific display of the specific color is displayed, the player pays attention to whether or not the specific light emitting effect is being executed. It is possible to make it possible to improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of form A33 is the gaming machine according to form A31 or form A32,
The effect executing means can execute a change suggesting effect suggesting that the specific display displayed in the special mode changes to the special mode in a first mode and in a second mode different from the first mode. (for example, a part that can execute the first effect effect and the second effect effect shown in the modification 135SG-5),
The special mode changes to the special mode at a higher rate when the change suggesting effect is executed in the second mode than when it is performed in the first mode (for example, modification 135SG-5 , the second effect effect can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a higher rate than the first effect effect by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ. The part that is the production),
When the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode, the specific light emission effect is executed at a higher rate than when the change suggestion effect is executed in the first mode (for example, in the modification 135SG-5 As shown, when the second action effect is executed, the winning flash effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first effect effect is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the change suggesting effect is executed in the first mode or the second mode, and the execution of the specific light emission effect causes the change suggesting effect to be executed in the second mode. It is possible to increase the expectation of being executed in two modes.

The gaming machine of form A34 is the gaming machine according to form A33,
The special mode is a first special mode in which the change suggesting effect is executed in the second mode and the rate of change to the special mode is low (for example, the display pattern δ ), and a second special mode in which the change suggesting effect is executed in the second mode and the rate of change to the special mode is higher than that in the first special mode (for example, variations 135SG-5 shown in FIGS. 40-120 including the display pattern ε) shown in
When the specific display is displayed in the second special mode, the ratio of execution of the specific light emission effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the first special mode (for example, when the specific display is displayed When the display pattern is displayed with the display pattern ε, the portion where the winning flash effect is executed is higher than when the specific display is displayed with the display pattern δ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the specific display is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode, and in the case of the second special mode in which the rate of change to the special mode is high. Since the specific light emission effect is executed at a high rate, the execution of the specific light emission effect can increase expectations for the specific display to be displayed in the second special mode.

The gaming machine of form A35 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A34,
The display means is capable of displaying, during the specific light emission effect, a specific light emission effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light emission effect so as to overlap a specific display corresponding to the variable display of the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, As shown in modification 135SG-7, a silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning can be displayed so as to overlap the active display in the active display area 135SG005A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize the specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, and the specific display is hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect. can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A36 is the gaming machine according to form A35,
The display means is capable of displaying a plurality of the specific light-emitting effect corresponding displays of different types (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-7, the image display device 5 has different sizes as a winning flash effect). The part where the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed),
The mode of overlapping with the specific display differs depending on the type of display corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in Figs. , a portion where the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap differently depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S to be displayed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a plurality of displays corresponding to the specific light emission effect are displayed, and the manner of overlap with the specific display changes depending on the displayed display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A37 is the gaming machine according to form A35 or form A36,
The specific display includes a first specific display (e.g., pending display) corresponding to a variable display that has not yet been executed, and a second variable display (e.g., active display) that corresponds to a variable display that is being executed,
The display means is capable of displaying the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect so as to overlap the first specific display corresponding to the specific light effect before the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started. In addition, during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it can be displayed so as to overlap the second specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-7, A silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap the pending display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D before the variable display as the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is started. , During the execution of the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap the active display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning displayed in the active display area 135SG005A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize the first specific display and the second specific display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, and not only the first specific display but also the second specific display are hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with more unexpectedness and improve the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of form A38 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A37,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) in which a variable display is temporarily stopped after a variable display is started and a display result is derived, and then the variable display is performed again,
The display means is capable of displaying a re-variable related display related to the re-variable display effect, and overlapping the re-variable related display with the specific light emission effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the specific light emission effect. (For example, in the case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the variable display during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, when the decorative symbol temporarily stops, it stops in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C A part where the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning can be displayed overlapping with the special pattern (see FIGS. 40-40 etc.),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the re-variable related display is hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, it is possible to add surprise to the player and improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of form A39 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A35 to A38,
The display means can display the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, FIGS. 40-28, 40-42(a) to 40-47 ( As shown in l), the part where the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even in the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize that the variable display is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the interest of the variable display, which is the target of the specific light emission effect, can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A40 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A39,
The production executing means is
Even during the variable display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, the first light emitting means is continuously caused to emit light in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect, and the predetermined end before the end of the variable display corresponding to the specific light emission effect. It is possible to control the effect to end the light emission at the timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-28, during the variable display that is the object of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed before the ready-to-win effect starts. flashes at a brightness of C2 and a period of T2, and turns off the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the start timing of the ready-to-win effect),
When light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect of the first light emitting means is not finished at the predetermined end timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event, the first light emitting means is emitted at a specific end timing after the predetermined end timing. Perform special end control to end the light emission of the light emitting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-22, the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display of the effect target due to the generation of static electricity etc. If it is not possible, at the end timing of the variable display (the reception timing of the pattern confirmation command), which is the timing after the start timing of the ready-to-win effect, the flash effect at the time of winning including the flashing of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning again. the part that ends the
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce discomfort when light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect does not end normally.

The gaming machine of form A41 is the gaming machine according to form A40,
Equipped with game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game,
The game control means can transmit variable display end information for notifying the end of variable display to the effect execution means when the variable display ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-4 (A) , a part where the CPU 103 can transmit a design determination command that designates the stop of the variable display of the decoration design),
The effect execution means performs the specific end control based on the reception of the variable display end information as the specific end timing (for example, as shown in FIG. The part that terminates the flash effect at the time of winning the late prize based on the receipt of the command),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to further reduce the sense of incongruity when terminating the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect.

The gaming machine of form A42 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A39 to A41,
The predetermined end timing includes a first predetermined end timing and a second predetermined end timing (for example, as shown in the modified example 135SG-4, when winning a prize at the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the ready-to-win effect) The part that can end the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F),
The specific end timing is a timing later than the predetermined end timing and the second predetermined end timing (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-4, the effect control CPU 120 may not flash when winning due to the generation of static electricity, etc.). If the blinking of the lamp 135SG009F cannot be stopped, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is included again at the end timing of the variable display, which is the timing after the start timing of the movable body operation suggestion effect and the start timing of the ready-to-win effect. The part that ends the flash effect at the time of the late winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even when the light emission cannot be ended at the second predetermined end timing, the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be ended at the specific end timing.

The gaming machine of form A43 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A42,
The production executing means is
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, reach effect of super reach) that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied while the specific effect is being executed, the specific light emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-21, the first start-up Part that does not determine the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning when the start winning to the mouth occurs),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to a decrease in attention to the specific effect.

The gaming machine of form A44 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A43,
The effect executing means does not execute the specific light emission effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied when the remaining period of the variable display is equal to or shorter than the predetermined period, and the remaining period of the variable display is the above-mentioned. When the predetermined condition is satisfied when the predetermined period is longer than the predetermined period, the specific light emission effect can be executed (for example, as shown in the modification 135SG-8, the first start port is operated during the execution of the variable display. When a start winning occurs, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and if the specified period is equal to or shorter than the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is not determined),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the specific display of the target of the specific light emission effect from becoming difficult to understand due to the execution of the specific light emission effect when the remaining period of the variable display is short.

The gaming machine of form A45 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A44,
The production executing means is
A specific effect suggesting control to be in an advantageous state can be executed even in a variable display that is not controlled in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-9, even in a variable display where the variable display result is The part that can execute reach production of super reach),
When the predetermined condition is established during execution of the specific effect in a variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state, the specific light emission effect can be executed in response to the start of the next variable display after the variable display (for example, deformation As shown in example 135SG-8, when a start winning to the first start opening occurs during execution of the variable display, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and the specified period is the first winning flash effect. If it is less than the execution period, on the condition that the variable display result of the variable display is lost, the part where the winning flash effect can be executed from the start timing of the next variable display),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the specific effect and the specific light emitting effect from deteriorating due to the overlapping execution of the specific effect and the specific light emitting effect.

The gaming machine of form A46 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A45,
a specific area (for example, a winning ball device 6A forming a first starting winning hole) in which the predetermined condition is established by passing the game medium;
a specific light emitting means (for example, a starter lamp 135SG009S) provided around the specific region and capable of emitting light in different light emission modes;
with
The display means can display in any one of a plurality of display modes in which the ratio of controlling the specific display to an advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIG. The part where the display can be displayed in any of the display patterns α to display patterns γ with different jackpot expectations),
The specific light emission means can emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the display mode of the specific display regardless of whether or not the specific light emission effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-28, When the display in the display pattern β or the display pattern γ is determined, the starter lamp 135SG009S is started regardless of the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect or the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 or the like. A part that emits light in a color corresponding to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ from the occurrence of the winning to the end of the variable display based on the starting winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display mode of the specific display can also be recognized by the light emission mode of the specific light emitting means provided around the specific area, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A47 is the gaming machine according to form A46,
The number of light emitting modes in which the specific light emitting means can emit light is greater than the number of light emitting modes in which the first light emitting means can emit light in the specific light emitting effect (for example, as shown in Modification 135SG-9, A part where the number of light emission modes of the starter lamp 135SG009S in the light emission effect of the starter lamp is greater than the number of light emission modes of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning in the flash effect at the time of winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since there are many light emission variations of the specific light emission means, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of form A48 is the gaming machine according to form A46 or form A47,
The light emission area of the first light emission means is larger than the light emission area of the specific light emission means (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-10, the light emission area in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as the winning flash effect is , A portion provided larger than the light emitting area where the starting port lamp 135SG009S emits light as a starting port lamp light emission effect),
In the period in which the specific light emitting means emits light according to the display mode of the specific display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition in 1, the first light emitting means emits light according to the specific light emission effect based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. (In the case where execution of both the winning flash effect and the hold display notice effect is determined based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off after the starting winning. While emitting light until the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the starting winning flash effect, the starting port lamp 135SG009S is the target of the holding display notice effect after the starting winning is generated. The part that emits light until the end of the variable display)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to excessively long execution of the light emission according to the specific light emission effect by the first light emission means, and to achieve an advantageous state by the light emission mode of the specific light emission means. A player's sense of expectation can be maintained for a long time.

The gaming machine of form A49 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A46 to A48,
Both the first light emitting means and the specific light emitting means are capable of blinking light emission (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in the part where the starter lamp 135SG009S can blink),
The blinking period of the first light emitting means is different from the blinking period of the specific light emitting means (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-10, the blinking period of the starting lamp 135SG009S is used as a winning flash effect as a winning flash effect. The part that is different from the flashing cycle of the lamp 135SG009F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the blinking periods are different, the player can be attracted to both the first light emitting means and the specific light emitting means, thereby improving the game interest.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 31 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 33). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 31, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable prize winning ball device 7 has a special prize winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 33), and the special winning prize opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special prize winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 31, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 31), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 33).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 33).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

32 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main substrate 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11 , and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29 . The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 50Aa and long pieces 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC 100 V external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal is turned off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turned on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 .

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 31 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main substrate 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 34, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is performed, and then the setting change process (step S7) is performed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop-display a lost symbol or the like, or to perform a display corresponding to a game stop state different from the lost symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the step The setting change process of S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 35 as the special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of start winning set to be transmitted in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 37 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. Figure 37 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variation special figure is the first special figure, and Figure 37 (B) shows that the variation special figure is the second special figure. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display assigned to the result. Thereby, when it is a high probability state such as a probability variable state in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability that it is determined to control to a big hit game state is higher than when it is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. get higher

In the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is determined to be the same value. has been assigned a value. In the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure display result Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the determination table. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" may be changed. The probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variation special figure may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment value is set regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to set value 6 are set. In this case, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to the "jackpot", only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 in the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. The playability may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined value provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probability variable state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time reduction control). A game property (a so-called one-type two-type mixed type) that controls a big hit game state based on the passage of a ball through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 may be employed. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 38 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to emit a prohibit command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 38 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 39, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving the command specifying the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 135SG)
Next, the characteristic portion 135SG (hereinafter abbreviated as the characteristic portion 135SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 40-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 135SG. As shown in FIG. 40-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic portion 135SG, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F imitating the character A is provided on the right side of the image display device 5, and a winning ball device 6A is provided. A starter lamp 135SG009S for lighting the winning ball device 6A (first starter) is provided in the vicinity of .

Further, a stick lamp 135SG009X for lighting the stick controller 31A is provided in the stick controller 31A, and a button lamp 135SG009Y for lighting the push button 31B is provided in the push button 31B. These stick lamps 135SG009X and button lamps 135Sg009Y constitute the game effect lamps 9 in the characteristic part 135SG together with the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d.

As shown in FIG. 40-2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the starting lamp 135SG009S, the stick lamp 135SG09X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y are connected to the lamp control board 14, and are used for effect control via the lamp control board 14. Lighting (blinking) is possible under the control of the CPU 120 .

FIG. 40-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 135SG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 135SG constitutes a first display area 135SG005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative patterns and ready-to-win effects. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 is a first reserved memory display area 135SG005D that can display the number of the first special figure reserved memory by the number of circular reserved displays, and the number of the second special figure reserved memory is displayed by the circular reserved display. A second display area 135SG005Sa including a second reserved memory display area 135SG005U that can be displayed according to the number of , and a telop display area 135SG005T that can display a telop indicating a game state, an effect during execution, and the like.

And the upper right end of the image display device 5 includes the display of the fourth symbol 135SG005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, the number of the first special figure pending storage, and the number of the second special figure pending storage. 3 display area 135SG005Sb.

In the center of the first display area 135SG005F, "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are arranged, and the decoration patterns can be displayed in a variable manner. It's becoming Also, a small pattern 135SG005M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F. The small designs are the decorative designs displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L, the decorative designs displayed in the "middle" decorative design display areas 5C, and the "right" decorative design display areas. Designs corresponding to each of the decorative designs displayed on 5R are vertically arranged. The small pattern 135SG005M is also a pattern that is always displayed within the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5 without being hidden during variable display.

40-3, in the characteristic portion 135SG, a decorative pattern is arranged in the central portion of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 135SG005M is the first display region of the image display device 5. 1 display area 135SG005F is arranged in a size smaller than the decorative pattern at the left end. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 135SG005M is lower than the visibility of the decoration pattern.

Furthermore, an active display area 135SG005A for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display is provided at the lower center of the first display area 135SG005F in the characteristic portion 135SG.

Henceforth, in this characteristic part 135SG, a hold display and an active display may be generically called a specific display.

FIG. 40-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the feature part 135SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 40-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 40-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 40-4(B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is "loss" or "big win" or "minor win". Different EXT data are set according to the result (predetermined result) or the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of a plurality of types of jackpot types when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 40-4(B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". . The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while being performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) where the time saving control is not performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is time saving control and probability change It is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-saving probability-variable state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big winning game or a small winning game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of a big win game or a small win.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state described later (for example, "1" to "10"). .

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a pattern designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" as a result of determination at the time of winning, the determination result of the big hit type (probability variation or non-probability variation), and whether it will be a small hit. . In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating whether the random number for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 40-4(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You can add commands that are different from the commands in For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the remaining frequency|count of a passage notification command, probability variation control, and time saving control to be performed.

FIG. 40-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 40-5, in this characteristic portion 135SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination. , and the random number MR4 for judging the result of normal/universal figure display are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big win" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". is a random value used to determine , and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 40-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM101. In this characteristic part 135SG, as a special figure display result determination table, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this , Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state is determined based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. It is a referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment is whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in this characteristic portion 135SG), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set to "jackpot" and controlled to the big hit game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to when it is a normal state or a time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the decision result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the probability of winning is increased.

In addition, FIG. 40-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for special symbol display result determination whether or not to control the variable display result to a small winning game state as a "small win". is a table referenced for

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this characteristic portion 135SG, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data showing the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is whether or not to control the special figure display result to the small hit game state as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the characteristic part 135SG, the number of determination values assigned to the "small hit" differs between the first special figure game and the second special figure. there is Specifically, in the case of the special game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value is assigned. Therefore, as described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control In the high base state where the winning to the mouth occurs and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, the "small hit" almost does not occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the prize winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of small hits in which a large number of game balls cannot be acquired, thereby preventing the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 40-7(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in the present characteristic portion 135SG selects one of a plurality of types of jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the jackpot game state. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot A", " It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots, such as "probability variable big hit B" and "probability variable big hit C".

Here, the jackpot type in the present characteristic portion 135SG will be described using FIG. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and shift to a high probability high base state, and high probability low base state in which high probability control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state but time saving control is not executed. There are set a "probability variable big hit C" to shift and a "non-probability variable big hit" to shift to a low probability high base state by executing only time saving control after the end of the big win game state.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. On the other hand, the big-hit game state by the "probability variable big-hit B" is a normal open big-hit game in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. . Then, the big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" is a normal open big win in which the land that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeated twice (so-called two rounds). . In addition, the big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" and "non-probability variable big win" is repeated twice (so-called two rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. It is usually an open jackpot. Therefore, "variable big hit A" is called 10 rounds (10R) big hit, "variable big hit B" is called 5 rounds (5R) big hit, and "variable big hit C" is called 2 rounds (2R) big hit. may be called.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the small winning game state in the characteristic portion 135SG is such that the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed twice to the first state that is advantageous for the player, and the opening time is 0.1 second. It's becoming In addition, after the end of the small winning game, the game state immediately before the small winning game is taken over.

The high-probability control and the time-saving control executed after the jackpot game state of the variable probability big win is finished are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the jackpot game state is finished. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is a variable probability big win, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed again after the big-win game state ends, so that the big-win game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state. , a so-called continuous state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 135SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times The game ends when a big win game state is entered before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 40-7 (A), depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probability variable big hit A", " Allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" is different. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is controlled to the normal opening jackpot state or the high-speed opening jackpot state with a small number of rounds by setting the jackpot type to ``probable variable jackpot B'' or ``probable variable jackpot C''. Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which there are few prize balls to be obtained is avoided. It is possible to prevent the game interest from deteriorating.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 40-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-variable jackpot or a definite variable jackpot, the probability is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as described above, depending on whether the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C" is different depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure Then, the allocation of the judgment value for the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special, the judgment value less than that of the special game of the first special is the big hit type of "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 40-8 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 135SG. In this characteristic portion 135SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases where the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In addition, in this characteristic portion 135SG, as the normal reach variation pattern, a normal reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous performance described later is not executed and a normal reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous performance described later is performed once, are common normal reach reach performance. is set to run. Furthermore, as the super reach variation pattern, a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect described later is performed twice and a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect described later is performed three times. A production is to be executed. In other words, in the characteristic portion 135SG, only one type of reach effect is provided as the reach effect of normal reach and the reach effect of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a plurality of reach effects may be provided as the reach effects of normal reach and the reach effects of super reach.

In addition, the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 135SG includes a special winning variation pattern ( PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 40-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this characteristic portion 135SG is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, the normal reach variation pattern in the characteristic portion 135SG includes a variation pattern in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and re-variably displayed during variable display, and a pseudo-continuous effect is not executed, and a pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during variable display. There is a variation pattern. In addition, in the normal reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed during the variable display is set to have a special figure variation time shorter than the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during the variable display.

Further, the super reach variation pattern in the characteristic portion 135SG includes a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is performed twice during variable display and a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is performed three times during variable display. In addition, in the super reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display is set to have a special figure variation time shorter than the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display. .

In addition, in this characteristic portion 135SG, since it is set so that the variable display result is "big hit" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, the degree of expectation of big hit becomes higher, so in the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

That is, with respect to the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern in the present characteristic portion 135SG, the greater the number of times of simulated continuous effects executed during variable display, the higher the degree of expectation for a big hit.

In addition, in the present characteristic unit 135SG, as will be described later, the type of variation pattern is first determined, such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number value for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and from the random value for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of the variation pattern first, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 40-9 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 135SG. In this characterizing section 135SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is changed according to the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40-9, when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is used to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of one-time jackpot of normal reach pseudo-continuous production), PB1-3 (variation pattern of two-time jackpot of super reach pseudo-continuous production), PB1-4 (super Reach pseudo continuous performance 3 times big hit variation pattern). Further, when the variable display result is a probability variable big hit, the big hit variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is PB1-1 (normal reach big hit variation pattern), PB1 using the big hit variation pattern determination table B. -2 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 1 time big hit), PB1-3 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 2 times big hit), PB1-4 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 3 times big hit) are determined. .

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 40-9, the big-hit variation pattern determination table A and the big-hit variation pattern determination table B have different decision ratios for PB1-1 to PB1-4. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 45%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-4 are determined at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PB1- 4 is determined at a rate of 45%. In other words, in the characteristic portion 135SG, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot. Furthermore, focusing on the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effects, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot, more pseudo-continuous effects are more likely to be executed during the variable display than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot. there is Therefore, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display and the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect.

Also, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special winning variation pattern determination table, and use the special winning variation pattern determination table to determine the variation pattern as PC1-1 (special winning variation pattern). do.

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, the fluctuation pattern is PA1-1 (variation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time loss variation pattern ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time fluctuation pattern of loss ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time fluctuation pattern of loss ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 4, the variation pattern determination table C for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time fluctuation pattern of loss ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

Also, if the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, and use the variation pattern determination table D for deviation to determine the variation pattern PA1-4 (Shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous production 1 time), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo-continuous production 2 times It is determined from PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing 3 times of super reach pseudo-continuous effect).

That is, if the variable display result in the present characteristic portion 135SG is "missing", the number of pending storage of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, etc., or based on the time saving state, the special figure Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), the variable display is performed more frequently due to the shortening fluctuation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4). , it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being slowed down.

In the RAM 102 of the characteristic portion 135SG, there is a game control data holding area 135SG150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The game control data holding area 135SG150 shown in FIG. 40-10 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B, a normal figure reservation storage unit 135SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 135SG152. , A game control timer setting unit 135SG153, a game control counter setting unit 135SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 135SG155.

The 1st special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A has a game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and although the start winning (first starting winning) has occurred, the special that has not yet started The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 135SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B has not started yet although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) occurs It stores the pending data of the special symbol game (the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 135SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, the starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern reservation storage unit 135SG151C stores the reservation information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 135SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 135SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 135SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 135SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 135SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 135SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data representing each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 135SG190 as shown in FIG. It is The production control data holding area 135SG190 shown in FIG. 40-11(A) includes a production control flag setting unit 135SG191, a production control timer setting unit 135SG192, a production control counter setting unit 135SG193, and a production control buffer setting unit 135SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 135SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 135SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 135SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 135SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 135SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 135SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 135SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 135SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing portion 135SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 135SG194A, the storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding areas) are provided. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ) is provided. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A are the area for storing these start winning prize designation commands and the symbol designation command. A storage area, an area for storing a variable category designation command, an area for storing a pending storage number notification command, an area for storing a pending display flag, and whether or not it is a target of a winning flash effect to be described later. A storage area (entry) is secured for storing an area for storing a flash effect target flag at the time of winning, and a storage area (entry) for separately storing the first special figure reserved memory and the second special figure reserved memory in association with the number of reserved memories. ing.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are changed when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The content (data) of the pending memory for which the start condition is satisfied is copied to the active display buffer 135SG194B in FIG. Deleted. Then, the storage contents of the storage areas lower than the deleted reserved storage are shifted to upper storage areas one by one.

In the active display buffer 135SG194B, as described above, when the variable display of the reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") is started, the contents of the reserved memory ( Data) is copied, so as shown in FIG. 40-11(C), a storage area similar to that of the start winning receive command buffer 135SG194A is provided. That is, an area for storing the start opening winning designation command, an area for storing the pattern designation command, an area for storing the variable category command, an area for storing the pending memory number notification command, and an area for storing the pending display flag , and an area for storing a win-time flash effect target flag indicating whether or not a win-time flash effect is to be performed, which will be described later.

In this characteristic part 135SG, when a start winning is generated when variable display is not executed and no pending memory exists, a start winning designation command, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a hold The stored number notification command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B without going through the reception command buffer 135SG194A at the time of start winning. It should be noted that the pending display flag is set by executing a pre-reading notice setting process (S161) described later by the effect control CPU 120. FIG.

Then, the storage contents of the active display buffer 135SG194B are cleared (deleted) in the special figure per waiting process executed when ending the variable display.

The suspended display flag is a flag indicating the display mode of the active display corresponding to the suspended display and the variable display being executed. Although the details will be described later, in this characterizing portion 135SG, it is possible to suggest the ratio of control to the big hit game state by the display mode of these pending display and active display (value of pending display flag).

Next, the start prize determination process of the characteristic portion 135SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 36 will be described with reference to FIG. 40-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step 135SGS101a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 135SGS101a; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 135SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 135SG154, it should have specified the number of 1st special figure reservation memory. At step 135SGS102, when the first special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value (step 135SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is set to "1" ( step 135 SGS 103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at step 135SGS101a (step 135SGS101; N), when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit at step 135SGS102 (step 135SGS102; Y), variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 135 SGS 101b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 135SGS101b; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 135SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, it is sufficient if it can identify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At step 135SGS105, when the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value (step 135SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is set to "2" ( step 135 SGS 106).

After executing either of the processes of step 135SGS103 and step 135SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the start buffer value, which is the stored value of the start buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (step 135SGS107). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the start buffer value is "2", the second reserve storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step 135SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of step 135SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for use and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted (step 135 SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this manner is stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the start buffer value (step 135SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A, while the start buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the process of step 135 SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step 135SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step 135SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 135SGS111, a winning random number determination processing is executed (step 135SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (Step 135SGS113). The reserved memory number notification command set in this way is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

After executing the processing of step 135SGS113, it is determined whether or not the starting buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114; Y), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS115). move on. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (step 135SGS114; N), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS116). End the process. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 40-13(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS112 of FIG. 40-12 as the winning random number determination process. In this characterizing part 135SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 36) sets the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbol) as "jackpot". It is determined whether or not to control to the jackpot gaming state. Also, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 36), determination of a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is performed.

On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning in step 135 SGS112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is to be displayed as a special figure display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, before the start of the variable display, it is decided whether or not to make a big hit. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on the determination result, the effect control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-reading preview effect is executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 40-13 (A), the CPU 103 first, for example, by checking the state of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 135SG152 etc., Pachinko game Identify the current gaming state of machine 1 (step 135SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability flag is on when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that the time saving state is when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are specified. When it is off, it should be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the processing of step 135SGS121, the special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 40-6 is selected and set (step 135SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 135SGS109 in FIG. 40-12 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 135SGS123). In the big hit determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected by the processing of step 135SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and each determination value. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined that it is not within the jackpot determination range in step 135SGS123, that is, when it is determined that the variable display does not hit the jackpot (step 135SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 40-6 2 is selected and set (step 135 SGS124). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 135SGS109 in FIG. 40-12 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 135SGS125).

When the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the variable display will result in a small hit (step 135 SGS125; Y), the variable display result is "small hit". Execute the transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command according to the event (step 135SGS126), select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table (step 135SGS127), and proceed to step 135SGS138. .

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when the variable display result is "loss" in the variable display, a pattern corresponding to the variable display result being "loss" Execute the transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the designation command (step 135 SGS128), and determine whether the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the current game state is the time saving state (step 135SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 135SGS129; N), select and set the change pattern determination table A for loss, and if the time saving flag is on (step 135SGS129; Y), change pattern determination for loss Table D is selected and set (step 135SGS131). Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is a variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the game state is the high base state in which the time reduction control is executed.

In addition to the deviation variation pattern determination table A and the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the characteristic part 135SG includes a deviation variation pattern determination table B that is used when the number of pending memories is 3. , and the deviation variation pattern determination table C used when the number of pending memories is 4 is prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. , In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, 600 determination values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. In the variation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values from 0 to 699 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern in the range that the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination can take, and the variation pattern determination table for loss In C, 800 determination values from 0 to 799 are assigned to non-reach variation patterns within the range that the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. On the other hand, in the variation pattern determination tables A to C for loss, 97 determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach out of the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. .

Therefore, in step 135SGS126, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always non-reach or super reach even if the number of pending memories changes after the determination Therefore, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination at the time of starting winning.

In addition, when it is determined in step 135SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that a jackpot will be hit during variable display (step 135SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 40-13(A) , the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 135 SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

In addition, the symbol designation command corresponding to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation jackpot A, the third symbol designation command in the probability variation jackpot B, and the probability variation jackpot C in the case of the probability variation jackpot C Executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, executes the transmission setting of the 5th symbol designation command (step 135 SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 135 SGS 134). If the determined jackpot type is non-probable variable jackpot (step 135SGS134; Y), select and set a jackpot variation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 135SGS135), and step Go to 135SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot (step 135SGS134; N), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table B (step 135SGS136), and proceed to step 135SGS138.

After executing any of the processing of step 135SGS127, step 135SGS130, step 135SGS131, step 135SGS135, and step 135SGS136, a numerical value indicating each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination data, a variation category is determined according to the range of determination values that include the random number MR3 (step 135SGS138). In this characteristic portion 135SG, as shown in FIG. 40-13(B), at least when the variable display result is "loss", the variable display mode of "non-reach" is common regardless of the total number of pending memories. A variable category that becomes a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category of "other" that becomes a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach), It suffices if it can be determined whether or not it is determined to be in such a fluctuation category based on the random value MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 135SGS138 to the effect control board 12 (step 135SGS139), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

FIG. 40-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 38 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 40-14, the effect control CPU 120 first receives data from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by checking the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is a command (step 135SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 135 SGS221; N), the command analysis process is terminated.

If there is a received command in step 135SGS221 (step 135SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first start winning prize designation command. (Step 135 SGS222).

In step 135SGS222, when the received command is not the first starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not the receiving command is the second starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS224).

At step 135SGS224, when the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the design designation command (step 135SGS226). If the received command is not a design designation command at step 135SGS226 (step 135SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variation category command (step 135SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command at step 135SGS227 (step 135SGS227; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS228).

If the received command is not the first reserved storage number notification command at step 135SGS228 (step 135SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second reserved storage number notification command (step 135SGS230).

If the received command in step 135SGS222 is the first starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS222; Y), or if the receiving command in step 135SGS224 is the second starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS224; Y), in step 135SGS226 If the received command is a pattern designation command (step 135SGS226; Y), if the received command is a variable category command in step 135SGS227 (step 135SGS227; Y), in step 135SGS228 the received command is the first pending storage number notification command If (135SGS228; Y), if the received command in step 135SGS230 is the second pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS230; Y), the received command is stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 135SG194A shown in FIG. Store at the beginning of the free area in the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS233), and return to the processing of step 135SGS221.

Specifically, in step 135SGS233, if there is no pending memory and variable display is not being executed, the received command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B. , the received command may be stored at the beginning of the empty area in the start winning received command buffer 135SG194A.

Incidentally, when the variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command) and the reservation storage number notification command (first reservation storage number notification command or second reservation storage number notification command) are received, , The pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A. That is, the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the starting winning can be stored sequentially from the top of the empty area in the receiving command buffer 135SG194A at the time of starting winning.

In step 135SGS230, if the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS230; N), settings are made according to other received commands (step 135SGS234), and the process returns to step 135SGS221.

In addition, in the command analysis processing of this characteristic part 135SG, if the received command is any of the starting entrance winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the pending storage number notification command, the received command is Although the form of sequentially storing from the beginning of the empty area of the received command buffer 135SG194A was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the received command is the first start winning prize designation command, the pending storage number notification command If a pending memory number notification command is not received before the timer times out, the entry pending memory that has not received the pending memory number notification command It may be set outside the target of the reading notice effect.

Next, the effect control process processing in this characterizing portion 135SG will be described. As shown in FIG. 40-15, in the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 120 executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161), and then the active display area 135SG005A, the first reservation storage display area 135SG005D and the second reservation. A specific display start effect execution process (step 135SGS162) is executed for executing a specific display start effect as a display start animation of the suspended display in the storage display area 135SG005U and a display start animation of the active display in the active display area 135SG005A. After the specific display start effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 performs a winning flash effect execution process (step 135 SGS163) for executing a winning flash effect. For executing a specific display rotation display effect (see FIGS. 40-19 (B-1) to 40-19 (B-4)) as a rotation animation according to the value of the display mode flag of the suspended display or active display Specific display rotating display effect execution processing (step 135SGS164), when the execution of the pending display notice effect is determined as the pre-reading notice in the feature part 135SG, the variable display based on the pending memory that is the target of the pending display notice effect is performed. Starting lamp light emission effect execution processing (step 135SG165) for executing the starting lamp light emitting effect of causing the starting lamp 135SG009S to emit light in a color corresponding to the display mode of the reserved display/active display based on the reserved memory until the end , and executes any one of steps S170 to S177.

Note that the specific display rotation display effect execution processing in the present characteristic portion 135SG includes processing for shifting each hold display to the next display position based on the start of the variable display and displaying it as a rotating animation, and processing for displaying the hold display as an active display. It also includes a process of shifting to the display area 135SG005A and displaying it as a rotation animation.

FIG. 40-16 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step 161 of FIG. 40-15 as pre-reading notice setting processing. In the pre-reading notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A or the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS240) to determine whether there is an entry whose display mode flag is not set. Determine (step 135 SGS241). If there is no entry whose display mode flag is not set (step 135SGS241; N), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. If there is an entry whose display mode flag is not set (step 135SGS241; Y), the It is determined whether or not there is an entry whose mode flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, whether or not the pending display notice effect as the pre-reading notice effect is already being executed (step 135 SGS242). .

If there is no entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2" (step 135 SGS242; N), it is further determined whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a small hit (step 135SGS243). When the symbol designation command of the entry does not indicate a small hit (step 135SGS243; N), the variable display result is specified from the symbol designation command of the entry (step 135SGS244a), and the variation category is determined from the variation category command of the entry. (step 135SGS244b). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pending display announcement effect and the display pattern based on the specified variable display result and variation category (step 135SGS245).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40-17, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is non-reach, 95% of the time, the suspension display notice effect is not executed (suspension display or active display The display mode is determined to be a white display pattern α), and at a rate of 5%, the suspension display notice effect is executed in the display pattern β (the display mode of suspension display or active display is blue), and 0% is decided to execute the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern γ (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is red).

In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is other (normal reach), 80% of the display pattern α ), and decided to execute the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is blue) at a rate of 20%, and execute the pending display notice effect at a rate of 0%. It is decided to execute with γ (display mode of pending display or active display is red).

In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is super reach, the suspension display notice effect is not executed (display pattern α in which the display mode of suspension display or active display is white) at a rate of 65%. decided to execute the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is blue) at a rate of 25%; It is decided to execute the display mode of the pending display or the active display in red).

In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit, it is determined at a rate of 15% to not execute the pending display notice effect (display pattern α in which the display mode of the pending display or active display is white), and at a rate of 30% It is decided to execute the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is blue), and the pending display notice effect is executed in the display pattern γ (the display mode of the pending display or the active display) at a rate of 55%. red).

In other words, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when the pending display or the active display is displayed in red, the target variable display result has a high probability of winning a big hit (jackpot expectation), and the pending display or the active display is displayed in white. It is set so that the ratio of the target variable display result to be missed is the highest when the target is set (expectation for big hit according to display color of pending display and active display: red > blue > white).

Returning to FIG. 40-16, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the pending display announcement effect has been determined in step 135SGS245 (step 135SGS246). If it is determined in step 135SGS245 to execute the pending display notice effect (step 135SGS246; Y), the display mode flag of the entry is set to a value ("1" or "2") corresponding to the determined display pattern ( Step 135 (SGS247), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated.

If there is an entry whose display mode flag is already set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS242; Y), if the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a small win (step 135SGS243; Y) , when it is decided not to execute the pending display notice effect (step 135SGS246; N), the display mode flag of the entry is set to "0" corresponding to non-execution of the display notice effect (step 135SGS248), End the pre-reading notice setting process.

It should be noted that this characteristic portion 135SG exemplifies a mode in which the pre-reading forewarning effect for determining the display mode of the pending display and the effect for determining the display mode for the active display can be collectively executed as a pending display forewarning effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. good.

FIG. 40-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS162 of FIG. 40-15 as the specific display display start effect execution process. In the specific display start effect execution processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not either the specific display start effect A or the specific display display start effect B is being executed (step 135SGS251). Whether or not the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B is being executed depends on the process timer for the specific display start effect A or the process timer for the specific display start effect B, which will be described later. The determination may be made based on whether or not it is in operation.

If the specific display display start effect A or the specific display display start effect B is not being executed (step 135 SGS251; N), it is determined whether or not the start winning designation command has been received (whether the start winning designation command reception flag is set). ) is determined (step 135SGS252). If the start winning designation command is not received (step 135 SGS252; N), the specific display display start effect execution processing is terminated. In addition, if there is a reception of the start winning designation command (step 135SGS252; Y), the newly generated pending memory entry is identified by referring to the start winning win command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B ( 263SGS273), it is determined whether or not it is the first special figure pending storage (step 135SGS253a). It should be noted that whether or not the first special figure reservation storage may be determined by the start opening winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry (specified entry) is not the first special figure pending storage (step 135SGS253a; N), proceed to step 135SGS255, and if the entry is the first special figure pending storage (step 135SGS253a; Y), specify It is determined whether or not the display mode flag of the entered entry is 0, that is, whether or not the entry is subject to the pending display notice effect (step 135 SGS254). If the display mode flag of the specified entry is 0, that is, if the entry is not subject to the pending display notice effect (step 135SGS254; Y), the process proceeds to step 135SGS255.

In the process of step 135 SGS255, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table for specific display start effect A according to the display position of the specific display (suspended display or active display). Then, the process timer for specific display display start effect A is started (step 135SGS256).

Further, if the display mode flag of the specified entry is not 0, that is, if the entry is the target of the suspension display notice effect (step 135 SGS254; N), the display position of the specified display (suspension display or active display) The corresponding process table for specific display display start effect B is selected (step 135SGS257). Then, the process timer for specific display start effect B is started (step 135SGS258).

After executing step 135SGS256 or step 135SGS258, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 of the set process table for specific display display start effect (step 135SGS259), and executes specific display display start effect execution processing. finish.

Further, when the specific display display start effect A or the specific display display start effect B is being executed (step 135 SGS251; Y), the effect control CPU 120 controls the process timer for the specific display start effect being executed (specific display display start The value of process timer for effect A or process timer for specific display start effect B) is decremented by 1 (step 135 SGS260), and the process timer for specific display start effect (current specific display display start effect being executed) is decremented by 1. process timer) has timed out (step 135SGS261). When the process timer for specific display start effect in execution has not timed out (step 135 SGS261; N), the effect device is controlled according to the process data of the process timer for specific display start effect in execution. (Step 135 SGS262), the specific display display start effect execution processing is terminated.

Further, when the process timer for specific display start effect during execution times out (step 135 SGS261; Y), whether the process timer for specific display start effect is the final process timer for specific display start effect. (Step 135SGS263). When the final process timer for specific display start effect times out (step 135SGS263; Y), the specific display start effect is terminated (step 135SGS267), and the specific display start effect execution process is terminated. If the final specific display display start effecting process timer has not timed out (step 135 SGS263; N), the process data is switched, the next specific display display start effecting process timer is started, and the next specific display is started. The effect device is controlled (steps 135SGS264, step 135SGS265, and step 135SGS266) in accordance with the contents corresponding to the process data of the process timer for display start effect, and the specific display start effect execution process is terminated.

As described above, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when a starting prize is generated and it is decided not to execute the prefetching notice effect (holding display notice effect) based on the starting prize, or when the starting prize is the second If it is a starting prize to the starting port, as shown in FIGS. , in the active display area 135SG005A or the reserved memory display areas 135SG005D and 135SG005U, an appearance animation is displayed in which the reserved display (active display) gradually appears from the bottom to the top as the specific display display start effect A. be.

It should be noted that, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the starting winning to the end of the appearance animation of the reserved display (active display) as the specific display display start effect A is about 0.2 seconds. Then, the suspended display (active display) after the end of the specific display display start effect A is the same as the other suspended displays and active displays as the specific display rotating display effect described above. Transition to display with rotation animation in .

In addition, when a starting prize is generated, execution of a pre-reading notice effect (holding display notice effect) is determined based on the starting prize, and the starting prize is a starting prize to the first starting port, As shown in FIGS. 40-20(A) to 40-20(C) and FIGS. 40-20(C-1) to 40-20(C-4), as the specific display display start effect B, first, On the image display device 5, an animation is displayed in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. After the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, if the variable display is executed at the timing of the start winning, or if the first special figure pending memory already exists, the character A is the first An animation is displayed that moves to the 1 reserved storage display area 135SG005D. At this time, the character A is displayed overlapping part of the active display area 135SG005A in the process of moving to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D.

Then, when the character A moves to the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D, as shown in FIGS. An animation is displayed that attacks (acts) on the position where the hold indication is displayed. When the display of the animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which the hold display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A attacked.

In the characteristic portion 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the starting prize to the end of the animation in which the character A attacks the position where the suspension display is displayed in the first suspension storage display area 135SG005D as the specific display display start effect B is finished. It is about 1 second, and the period from the end of the animation to the end of the pending display appearance animation is about 0.2 seconds. That is, when executing the specific display start effect B targeting the reserved display of the first special figure, it takes 1.2 seconds from the start winning to the completion of the display of the holding display based on the starting winning. need. Then, the suspended display after the end of the specific display display start effect B is transferred to the rotation animation display in the first suspended memory display area 135SG005D as the above-described specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays and active displays. .

In addition, when the character A appears from the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F as the specific display display start effect B, when the variable display is not executed at the timing of the start win and the first special figure reservation memory does not exist. , an animation is displayed in which the character A moves to the active display area 135SG005A. Then, when the character A moves to the active display area 135SG005A, the active display of the character A is displayed on the basis of the start winning as in FIGS. 40-20(C-1) to 40-20(C-4). An animation that attacks (acts) is displayed on the position where the target is, that is, the active display area 135SG005A. When the display of the animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which the active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A attacked.

In the characteristic portion 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the starting prize to the end of the animation in which the character A attacks the active display area 135SG005A as the specific display display start effect B is about 0.5 seconds. The period from the end to the end of the appearance animation of the active display is approximately 0.2 seconds. That is, when the specific display display start effect B is executed for the active display, it takes 0.7 seconds from the start winning to the completion of the display of the active display based on the starting winning. Then, the active display after the end of the specific display start effect B shifts to the rotation animation display in the active display area 135SG005A as the specific display rotating display effect described above.

FIGS. 40-21 and 40-22 are flow charts showing an example of the processing executed in step 135SGS163 of FIG. 40-21 as the winning flash effect execution processing. In the winning flash effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning receive command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS272), and displays these in the start winning receive command buffer 135SG194A and active display buffer 135SG194B. It is determined whether or not there is an entry whose mode flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, whether or not the pending display notice effect is being executed (step 135 SGS273).

If there is an entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2" (step 135 SGS273; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the entry is based on the start winning to the first start port. It is determined whether or not (step 135SGS274). Incidentally, whether or not the entry is based on the start winning to the first starting opening may be specified from the starting opening winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry is based on the start winning to the first start opening (step 135SGS274; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the game state is the normal state (step 135SGS275). If the game state is a normal state (step 135SGS275; Y), further whether the value of the effect control process flag is any one of 0 to 3, that is, the game state is a big hit game state or a small hit game state (Step 135SGS276). If the value of the effect control process flag is any one of 0 to 3 (step 135SGS276; Y), the variation category of the entry (the entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2") is super. It is determined whether or not it is a reach (step 135SGS277).

If the variable category of the entry is super reach (step 135 SGS277; Y), it is determined whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is 2, that is, whether variable display is being executed (step 135 SGS278). When the value of the effect control process flag is 2 (step 135SGS278; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the ready-to-win effect is being executed (step 135SGS279). It should be noted that whether or not the ready-to-win effect is being executed may be determined from the contents of the process data displayed in the variable display.

If the value of the effect control process flag is not 2 (step 135SGS278; N) or if the ready-to-win effect is not being executed (step 135SGS279; N), the effect control CPU 120 executes the win-time flash effect based on the variable display result.・Determine non-execution. It should be noted that the variable display result may be specified from the symbol designation command of the entry for which the win-time flash effect target flag is not set.

As shown in FIG. 40-24, when the result of the variable display is a failure, execution of the winning flash effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and non-execution of the winning flash effect is determined at a rate of 90%. When the result of the variable display is a big win, execution of the flash performance at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 20%, and non-execution of the flash performance at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 80%.

That is, in this characteristic part 135SG, when the winning flush performance is executed from the start winning, the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is set higher than when the winning flash performance is not executed.

Returning to FIG. 40-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the winning flash effect is determined (step 135SG279b). If it is decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning (step 135SG279b; Y), the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is set to the target of the flash effect at the time of winning of the relevant entry (the entry for which the flag for the flash effect at the time of winning is not set). (Step 135SG280), and the flash effect execution flag at the time of winning is turned on (Step 135SG280a). The process table for the flash effect at the time of the first prize winning is selected, the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the first prize winning is started, the effect device is controlled according to the content of the process data 1 (steps 135SGS281 to step 135SGS283), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS292.

As shown in FIG. 40-23, the flash effect at the time of winning the first term means that the flash effect at the time of winning 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are set to the flash effect at the time of winning for 1.5 seconds from the occurrence of the start winning. Flashing in a corresponding manner (as shown in FIGS. 40-26 (A) and 40-26 (B), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are lit at high luminance C1 and extinguishing are repeatedly executed), the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1, and the effect image 135SG005E of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in this characteristic part 135SG is the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term, which is output during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the first term winning, and the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter term, which is output during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the latter term winning. It is divided into the sound corresponding to the flash effect and the sound corresponding to the flash effect. Among these, as the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the first term, a sound having a relatively short output period (for example, one second), such as an electronic sound or a voice sound of a specific character, may be output once. Further, as the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the late winning, a sound such as dedicated BGM or SE (sound effect) having a longer output period than the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the early winning may be output repeatedly. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 135SG, in addition to the above-described winning flash effect sound, a plurality of effect sounds such as a notice effect corresponding sound and a variable display corresponding sound to be described later are generated using different channels. Simultaneous output from the speakers 8L and 8R is possible depending on the volume.

In addition, if the entry is based on winning a prize to the second start port (step 135SG274; N), if the gaming state is not normal (step 135SG275; N), the effect control process flag is any of 0-3 If neither (step 135SG276; N), if the variation category of the entry is not super reach (step 135SG277; N), if the ready-to-win effect is being executed (step 135SG279; Y), no winning flash effect is determined (step 135SG279b), the winning flash effect target flag of the entry is set to "0" indicating that the winning flash effect is not the target (step 135SG279c), and the winning flash effect execution process is executed. finish.

In addition, when the prize winning flash effect execution flag is ON at step 135SGS271 (step 135SGS271; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process timer for the first winning flash effect is in operation (step 135SGS271). 135SGS284). When the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous winning is in operation (step 135SGS284; Y), the value of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous winning is decremented by 1 (step 135SGS285), and the previous term after decrementing the value by 1. It is determined whether or not the process timer for winning flash effects has timed out (step 135SGS286). When the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous winning has not timed out (step 135 SGS286; N), the effect control CPU 120 operates the effect device according to the process data of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous winning being executed. control (step 135SGS287) and proceed to step 135SGS292.

Also, when the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous term has timed out (step 135SGS286; Y), it is determined whether or not the last process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous term has timed out (step 135SGS288). When the final process timer for flash effect at the time of winning the last term has not timed out (step 135 SGS288; N), the effect control CPU 120 executes switching of the process data, and starts the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the next previous term winning. , the effect device is controlled in accordance with the process data of the process timer for flash effect at the time of winning the next period (step 135SGS289, step 135SGS290, step 135SGS291), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS292.

In step 135SGS292, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the button lamp 135SG009X and the stick lamp 135SG009Y, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. is controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning the first term. Also, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 (step 135SGS293), and the winning flash effect execution process is terminated. As a mode corresponding to the first winning flash effect, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be repeatedly illuminated in white or red. In addition, as a mode corresponding to the winning flash effect, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the button lamp 135SG009X and the stick lamp 135SG009Y, and the winning flash effect. The lamp 135SG009F may emit light in the same color.

Also, in step 135SGS288, when the final process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning the last term has timed out (step 135SGS288; Y), the effect control CPU 120 ends the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term (step 135SGS294). Then, the process table for flash effect at the time of late winning is selected, the process timer for flash effect at the time of late winning is started, the effect device is controlled according to the content of process data 1 (step 135SGS294 to step 135SGS297), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

As shown in FIG. 40-23, the flash effect at the time of winning means that the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning is turned on from the end of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term to the start timing of the reach effect of the target variable display super reach. A silhouette image of the character A imitated by a lamp 135SG009F for winning a flash in an image display device 5 is flashed in a manner corresponding to the flash performance at winning, a sound corresponding to the flash performance at winning is output from speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V1. This is an effect for displaying 135SG005S. As a mode corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter term, the lamp for flashing at the time of winning 135SG009F may be caused to repeatedly emit light in white or red as in the flash effect at the time of winning in the first term. Since the late winning flash effect is performed at a lower luminance than the early winning flash effect (see FIG. 40-28), the actual lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the late winning flash effect is as follows. It will emit light in a darker color than the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term.

As shown in FIG. 40-27(A), the game effect lamp 9 (particularly the frame lamp 9b) has a luminance C2 which is lower than the luminance C1 described above during a period other than during execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term. It is designed to repeat lighting and (blinking) extinguishing with . In particular, the blinking cycle at the brightness C2 is longer than the blinking cycle during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period, and during the blinking, it is shown in FIGS. Thus, the frame lamp 9b blinks while changing the emission color step by step in a manner corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5 . For this reason, the game effect lamp 9 during the period other than the period during execution of the flash performance at the time of the previous winning has a lower impression given to the player than the game effect lamp 9 during the execution of the flash performance at the time of the previous winning.

Further, if the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the early winning is not in operation at step 135SGS284, that is, if the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning is in operation (step 135SGS284; N), the effect control CPU 120 Decrease the value of the process timer for flash effect at the time of winning by 1 (step 135SGS298), and judge whether or not the process timer for flash effect at the time of winning after decreasing the value by 1 has timed out (step 135SGS299). When the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning has not timed out (step 135 SGS299; N), the effect device is controlled according to the contents corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning being executed (step 135 SGS300). ), go to step 135 SGS307.

Then, when the process timer for flash effect at the time of late winning has timed out (step 135SGS299; Y), it is determined whether or not the last process timer for flash effect at the time of late winning has timed out (step 135SGS301). When the final process timer for flash effects at the time of the latter period has not timed out (step 135 SGS301; N), the process data is switched, the next process timer for the flash effects at the time of the latter period is started, and the process data 1 Control the rendering device according to the content (steps 135SGS302 to step 135SGS304), and proceed to step 135SGS307.

Further, when the final process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning has timed out (step 135 SGS301; Y), the first process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning is started, and the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the process data 1 ( Step 135SGS305, step 135SGS306) and step 135SGS307.

At step 135SGS307, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in a manner corresponding to the latter winning flash effect. Also, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 (step 135SGS308).

Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 checks the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS309), and determines whether or not "1" is set in the winning flash effect target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B, that is, the variable display during execution. It is determined whether or not is the variable display for flash effect at the time of winning (step 135SGS310). When "0" is set in the winning flash effect target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS310; N), the winning flash effect execution processing is terminated. When "1" is set in the winning flash effect target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS310; Y), it is determined whether or not it is time to start the ready-to-win effect (step 135SGS311).

When it is time to start the ready-to-win effect (step 135SGS311; Y), the effect control CPU 120 ends the flash effect at the time of the late winning, turns off the flash effect executing flag at the time of winning (step 135SGS312, step 135SGS313), and Terminate the flash effect execution process.

Moreover, when it is not the ready-to-win effect start timing (step 135SGS311; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a pattern confirmation command is received (step 135SGS311a). When there is a reception of the pattern confirmation command (step 135SGS311a; Y), the flash effect at the time of winning is ended, the flash effect execution flag at the time of winning is turned off (step 135SGS312, step 135SGS313), and the flash effect execution processing at the time of winning is executed. finish. If the symbol confirmation command is not received (step 135SGS311a; N), the winning flash effect execution process is terminated without executing the processes of steps 135SGS312 and 135SGS313.

As described above, the flash effect at the time of early winning in the present characteristic section 135SG is a effect that ends when a predetermined effect period (for example, 1.5 seconds) elapses, while the flash effect at the time of late winning is the effect It is an effect that is repeatedly executed without ending every time a certain period passes until the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the target variable display.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display of the object of effect due to the generation of static electricity or the like during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the start timing of the ready-to-win effect. At the end timing of the variable display (the reception timing of the pattern confirmation command), which is the later timing, it is possible to end the late winning flash effect including blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F.

Incidentally, as shown in step 135SGS281 in FIG. 40-21 and step 135SGS295 in FIG. is selected, and one process table for effect is selected as the process table for flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period. In other words, regardless of the number of reserved memories, etc., the effect pattern (effect period) of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term and the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term of this characteristic part 135SG is always the same effect mode and the same effect period at the time of winning the first term regardless of the number of reserved memories. A flash effect and a flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period are executed.

FIG. 40-25 is a flow chart showing the effect process during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from each value of the process timer, the variable time timer, and the variable control timer (step 135SGS351, step 135SGS352, step 135SGS353). The process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are timers set in the variable display start setting process.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356). If the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356; Y), the process data is switched (step 135SGS357). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next process timer set value in the process table set in the variable display start setting process to the process timer (step 135 SGS358). In addition, the control state for the production device (parts for production) is changed based on the next set display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. (step 135SGS359). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out (step 135 SGS356; N), the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) Control of the production device (parts for production) is executed according to (step 135SGS360).

In particular, as the control contents of step 135SGS359 and step 135SGS360, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a variable display corresponding sound corresponding to the variable display being executed from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2 smaller than the volume V1 (step 135SGS361). Note that the variable display corresponding sound in the characteristic portion 135SG refers to BGM corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5, BGM corresponding to the number of simulated continuous effects performed during variable display, and the like. Further, when the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is not executed (step 135SGS362; N), blinking control is performed in a manner corresponding to the variable display during execution of the game effect lamp 9 (step 135SGS363). While the effect is being executed (step 135SGS362; Y), the flashing control in the mode corresponding to the variable display during execution of the game effect lamp 9 is not executed (as shown in FIGS. 40-21 and 40-22, the game effect The lamp 9 is controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning the first term).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a notice effect execution process (step 135SG364). In the notice effect execution processing, for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display start setting processing, it is determined whether or not the notice effect is to be executed during execution of the variable display, and in which effect pattern the notice effect is executed. It suffices if it is determined whether or not, and the advance notice effect can be executed according to the determination result. Further, when the effect pattern of the notice effect is determined in the variable display start setting process described above, one effect pattern is determined from a plurality of effect patterns at different ratios according to the result of the variable display. The ratio of control to the jackpot game state may be made different depending on whether the performance pattern is executed.

The effect executed as the advance notice effect in the characteristic portion 135SG is a dialogue effect in which the character's lines are displayed on the image display device 5, and the degree of expectation for the big win varies according to the displayed lines.

Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365). When the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen for the left, middle, and right decorative patterns (displayed after 30 ms have elapsed since the display of the previous decorative pattern was switched). The image data of the screen to be displayed) is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 135SGS366). Thus, in the image display device 5, the variable display control of the decoration pattern is realized. The display control unit 123 transmits to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing the image data of a predetermined area such as the set background image and the image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this manner, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image and the decorative design in the variable display of the decorative design. Also, a predetermined value is reset to the variable display control timer (step 135SGS367).

Also, when the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 135SGS365; N) or after execution of step 135SGS366, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 135SGS368). . If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 135 SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the determination command reception flag indicating that the symbol determination command has been received is set (step 135 SGS369; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is waited for a special symbol. (Step S173) is updated to a value according to (Step 135SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, when the pattern confirmation command is received, the control is shifted to stop the variable display. is received, the variable display of the decorative design can be terminated when the regular variable display time elapses (at the end of the variable display of the special design).

Process data during variable display of decorative patterns is set in the process table used for variable display control of decorative patterns. That is, the sum of the process timer set values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decoration pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n expires in the process of step 135 SGS356, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and the decoration design effect control based on the process table is finish.

Next, the operation mode of each effect device when executing the winning flash effect in the present characterizing section 135SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 40-28 to 40-68. First, FIG. 40-28 is a timing chart in the case where a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and it is decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start winning. FIG. 40-28 shows both the case where execution of the holding display notice effect is decided when the execution of the winning flash effect is decided based on the start winning, and the case where it is decided not to execute the holding display notice effect. It is a corresponding timing chart. Figures 40-29 to 40-48 show the image display device 5 when a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and execution of the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the start winning. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. Figures 40-49 to 40-68 show that a starting prize is generated during the execution of the variable display, and based on the starting winning, execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined, while non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a presentation mode in the image display device 5 and the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the case of winning.

40-29 to 40-48 ``When execution of pending display notice effect and winning flash effect is determined'', the display mode of the pending display, which is the target of winning flash effect, is the display pattern β or This is the case where it is displayed in the display pattern γ (displayed in a blue or red round shape), and "while the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning has been decided, the pending display notice" shown in FIGS. "When it is decided not to execute the effect" refers to the case where the display mode of the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect, is displayed in the display pattern α (displayed in a white round shape).

First, as shown in FIGS. 40-28 and 40-29 (A), during the execution of the variable display, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern, and the variable display is performed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The corresponding sound is output at volume V2. Further, during the execution of the variable display, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes at the cycle T0 corresponding to the variable display (FIGS. 40-27(A) to 40-27 Blinking in the mode shown in (D)) is controlled.

Further, during execution of the variable display, during the execution period of the notice effect, an image corresponding to the effect pattern of the notice effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound corresponding to the production pattern (for example, a sound corresponding to the advance notice production such as the sound of a character speaking characters displayed on the image display device 5) is output at volume V2. In addition, as the reserved memory, there are three first special figure reserved memories (three reserved indications are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

During such a variable display, if a prize is awarded to the first start port (start prize), and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start prize, FIG. As shown in 40-28 and FIG. 40-29(B), the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started.

First, as shown in FIG. 40-28 and FIG. 40-29 (B), the flash effect corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to volume V1 (V1>V2). At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are once turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-28, 40-30(C), and 40-30(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed around the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG009X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the period T1. In addition, in the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

Further, when the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term is started, as shown in FIGS. , an animation is displayed in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F which is controlled to blink, and an animation is displayed in which the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. After the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the reserved display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D (in the case of this feature part 135SG, the fourth reserved An animation that attacks (acts) against the position where the display is displayed is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect (previous winning flash effect) being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the acting position. Appearance animation is displayed (see FIGS. 40-20 (D-1) to 40-20 (D-5)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D is completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

That is, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when a start winning occurs during the variable display, and execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the start winning, display of the pending display based on the starting win is completed. At the same time, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. It should be noted that the appearance animation of the reserved display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect B in the present characteristic portion 135SG is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period (FIGS. 40-32 (G) and FIG. 40 -32(H)).

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the late stage, as shown in FIGS. 40-28, 40-32 (G) and 40-32 (H), the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2. At the same time, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking with brightness C2 and period T2 (period T2>period T1). Also, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals.

It should be noted that at the end timing of the flash effect for the first-term winning and the start timing of the flash effect for the second-term winning, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, The light emission mode (blinking at the brightness C1 and the period T1) according to the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term of the attacker lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d) ends. The light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is similar to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. 40-27(A) to 40-27(D). That is, the light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is based on the end of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term. At the time of winning the first term, the light emission mode is returned to before the start of the flash performance. Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are kept turned off after the start timing of the flash effect at the time of the late winning.

The game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y blink at the brightness C2 and the period T0 as described above. As the same mode as the mode before execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (light emission mode shown in FIG. 40-29 (A)), a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image) If the background image is an evening image, the gradation is performed using a red color, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1, but is shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2 >T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-32(H), 40-33(I), and 40-33(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which the transparent black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the entire first display area 135SG005F except for the active display area 135SG005A. The silhouette image 135SG005S in the characteristic portion 135SG is displayed in blue so as to be easily recognized by the player when displayed overlapping the black image 135SG005B.

In this characterizing portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in blue so that the player can easily see it when displayed overlapping the black image 135SG005B, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed in a color other than blue, such as green or red. In particular, when the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed in a plurality of colors such as blue, green, and red as described above, the degree of expectation for a big hit may be changed according to the color in which the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed. good. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the color of the silhouette image 135SG005S, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 40-32(H) and 40-33(J), in the characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the image display device 5, a small pattern 135SG005M is displayed at the left end. Therefore, in the winning flash effect of the characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small pattern 135SG005M are not displayed in an overlapping manner, and the player can display the silhouette image 135SG005S during the winning flash effect. It is possible to confirm whether or not the variable display is being executed by visually recognizing the small pattern 135SG005M regardless of whether or not it is being executed.

As shown in FIGS. 40-33 (J), 40-34 (K) and 40-34 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design determination command, the image display device 5 displays the decorative design and The small symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing section 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is during the symbol fixing period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 40-33(J), the image display device 5 displays the silhouette image 135SG005S in a state where the black image 135SG005B is displayed in an overlapped manner even during the design determination period, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the silhouette image 135SG005S. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at the volume V2.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted rightward by one. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 40-34(K) to 40-41(Z), in the variable display before the variable display which is the target of the winning flash effect, the speaker 8L as the late winning flash effect, Output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from 8R at the volume V2, blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning with brightness C2 and period T2, and display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 40-38 (S) to 40-40 (X), in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (FIG. 40-40 (W ).In this characterizing portion 135SG, decorative patterns showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and special patterns indicating temporary stop are temporarily stopped in the inner decorative pattern display area 5C. ), as a flash effect at the time of the late winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning flashes with a brightness of C2 and a period of T2, and the image display device 5 is executed to display the silhouette image 135SG005S.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 40-41 (Y) and 40-41 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is lost according to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is completed, the image display device 5 displays the decoration pattern and the small display. The pattern 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing portion 135SG is also executed during the pattern fixing period of the variable display that is out of normal reach. That is, as shown in FIGS. 40-41(Y) and 40-41(Z), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 in a state where the black image 135SG005B is overlapped and displayed even during the design determination period. At the same time, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2.

As shown in FIGS. 40-40(W) and 40-40(X), during the temporary stop period of the decoration pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are applicable. It emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped for the first time in the variable display, it emits light in blue with luminance C2), and the background image is based on the execution of the re-variable display. It returns to the light emission mode according to . Furthermore, during the period in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbols 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary suspension. It is possible to recognize that the variable display has not ended yet.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-42(a) and 40-42(b), when the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. A suspended display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIGS. 40-43(c) to 40-47(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning the late prize is continuously executed. Also, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 40-43(d) and 40-44(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 40-45(g) to 40-46(j). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, during the period in which the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIGS. 40-46 (j)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R emit light. Winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C2 and period T2, and silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on image display device 5. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 40-45(g) and 40-46(j), during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are displayed in the decorative pattern. (for example, blue with luminance C2 for the first temporary stop, and green with luminance C2 for the second temporary stop) according to the temporary stop, and to execute the re-variable display Based on this, the light emission mode returns to the light emission mode corresponding to the background image. Although not shown in the characteristic portion 135SG, in the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker The lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode (for example, red with luminance C2) corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decoration pattern, and light emission corresponding to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display. Back to Aspects.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-48 (m) and 40-48 (n), when it is time to start the ready-to-win effect due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 After 135SG005F is once whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white), the ready-to-win effect is started. In addition, in this characterizing portion 135SG, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the white-out timing, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F blinks with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends.

At the white-out timing, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y finish blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T0. . These main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are kept off during the whiteout period.

That is, during the white-out period, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are kept turned off. Then, from the timing when the white-out ends, as a mode corresponding to the above-described ready-to-win effect, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d respond to the ready-to-win effect. The light emission mode (lighting at luminance C1) is started.

Also, during the white-out period, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In other words, during the whiteout period, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and no sound is produced. At the same time that the attack lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d start emitting light (lighting at the brightness C1) according to the ready-to-win effect, the output of the ready-to-win effect corresponding sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect from the speakers 8L and 8R is started. . Incidentally, as the ready-to-win effect corresponding sound in the feature part 135SG, BGM or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound may be output so that the player can recognize that the ready-to-win effect (the ready-to-win effect of super reach) is being executed. Just do it.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 40-28, when a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and execution of the holding display notice effect is determined based on the start winning, the start lamp light emission effect is From the start winning timing, the starting port lamp 135SG009S changes color according to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect (for example, if the display pattern of the pending display is the display pattern β, it is blue, and the display pattern of the pending display is the display pattern γ). red) to start emitting light.

The light emission of the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S is an effect that is executed completely independently of the flash effect at the time of winning described above. Light emission in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is continued until the target variable display of the start lamp light emission effect (the target variable display of the flash effect at the time of winning) ends from the time of winning.

Next, a description will be given of a case where execution of the holding display forewarning effect as well as the flash effect at the time of winning is not determined in the start winning during the execution of the variable display.

First, as shown in FIGS. 40-28 and 40-49 (A), during the execution of the variable display, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern, and the variable display is performed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The corresponding sound is output at volume V2. Further, during the execution of the variable display, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is lit, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes at the cycle T0 corresponding to the variable display (FIGS. 40-27(A) to 40-27 Blinking in the mode shown in (D)) is controlled.

Further, during execution of the variable display, during the execution period of the notice effect, an image corresponding to the effect pattern of the notice effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound corresponding to the production pattern (sound corresponding to the advance notice production) is output at volume V2. In addition, as the reserved memory, there are three first special figure reserved memories (three reserved indications are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

During such a variable display, if a prize is awarded to the first start port (start prize), and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start prize, FIG. As shown in 40-28 and FIG. 40-49(B), the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started.

First, as shown in FIG. 40-28 and FIG. 40-49 (B), the flash effect corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to volume V1 (V1>V2). At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are once turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-28, 40-50(C), and 40-50(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed around the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the cycle T1. In addition, in the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

Further, when the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term is started, as shown in FIGS. , an appearance animation is displayed in which the pending display, which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning (the flash effect at the time of winning the first term), which is being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top (Fig. 40-19 (B-1) to Fig. 40-19 (B-4)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D is completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

In particular, when the specific display display start effect A is executed together with the winning flash effect, the pending display appearance animation ends when the effect image 135SG005E is still being displayed on the image display device 5 . On the other hand, when the specific display display start effect B described above is executed together with the winning flash effect, the appearance animation of the pending display ends after the display of the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 ends (FIGS. 40-32). That is, when the specific display start effect A is executed, the display of the pending display (appearance animation) is completed at an earlier timing than when the specific display display start effect B is executed, and the rotation animation is started. there is

That is, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when a start winning occurs during the variable display, and execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the start winning, display of the pending display based on the starting win is completed. At the same time, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. It should be noted that the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect A in this characterizing portion 135SG is completed during the execution of the previous winning flash effect.

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the late stage, as shown in FIGS. 40-28, 40-52 (G) and 40-52 (H), the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2. At the same time, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking with brightness C2 and period T2 (period T2>period T1). Also, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals.

It should be noted that at the end timing of the flash effect for the first-term winning and the start timing of the flash effect for the second-term winning, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, The light emission mode (blinking at the brightness C1 and the period T1) according to the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term of the attacker lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d) ends. The light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is similar to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. 40-27(A) to 40-27(D). That is, the light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is based on the end of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term. Return to the lighting mode before the start of the flash performance at the time of winning the first term. Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are kept turned off after the start timing of the flash effect at the time of the late winning.

The game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y blink at the brightness C2 and the period T0 as described above. As the same mode as the mode before execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (light emission mode shown in FIG. 40-29 (A)), a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image) gradation in bluish colors, gradation in reddish colors if the background image is an evening image, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1, but is shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2 >T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-52(H), 40-53(I) and 40-53(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which the transparent black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the entire first display area 135SG005F except for the active display area 135SG005A.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 40-52(H) and 40-53(J), in this characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the image display device 5, a small pattern 135SG005M is displayed at the left end. Therefore, in the winning flash effect of the characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small pattern 135SG005M are not displayed in an overlapping manner, and the player can display the silhouette image 135SG005S during the winning flash effect. Whether or not the variable display is being executed can be confirmed by visually recognizing the small pattern 135SG005M regardless of whether or not the variable display is being executed.

As shown in FIGS. 40-53 (J), 40-54 (K) and 40-54 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design determination command, the image display device 5 The symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the outputs of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R are stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing portion 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is during the pattern fixing period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 40-53(J), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state where the black image 135SG005B is overlapped and displayed on the image display device 5 even during the design determination period, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the silhouette image 135SG005S. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at the volume V2.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted rightward by one. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 40-54(K) to 40-61(Z), in the variable display before the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, the speaker 8L as the late winning flash effect, Output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from 8R at volume V2, flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F with brightness C2 and period T2, and display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 40-58 (S) to 40-60 (X), in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (FIG. 40-60 (W ).In this characterizing portion 135SG, decorative patterns showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and special patterns indicating temporary stop are temporarily stopped in the inner decorative pattern display area 5C. ) also, as a flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter stage, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is output at a volume V2, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning flashes with a brightness of C2 and a period of T2, and the image display device 5 , the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 40-61 (Y) and 40-51 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is lost in response to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect ends, the image display device 5 displays the decoration pattern and the small display. The pattern 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing portion 135SG is also executed during the pattern fixing period of the variable display that is out of normal reach. That is, as shown in FIGS. 40-61 (Y) and 40-61 (Z), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed while the black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the image display device 5 even during the design determination period. At the same time, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2.

As shown in FIGS. 40-60(W) and 40-60(X), during the temporary stop period of the decoration pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are applicable. It emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped for the first time in the variable display, it emits light in blue with luminance C2), and the background image is based on the execution of the re-variable display. It returns to the light emission mode according to . Furthermore, during the period in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbols 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary suspension. It is possible to recognize that the variable display has not ended yet.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-62(a) and 40-62(b), when the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. A suspended display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIGS. 40-63(c) to 40-67(l), in the variable display, the flash effects at the time of winning the late prize are continuously executed. Also, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 40-63(d) and 40-64(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 40-65(g) to 40-66(j). reference).

As shown in FIGS. 40-65(g) and 40-66(j), during the temporary stop period of the decorative design, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are displayed in the decorative design. (for example, blue with luminance C2 for the first temporary stop, green with luminance C2 for the second temporary stop) according to the temporary stop, and to execute the re-variable display Based on this, the light emission mode returns to the light emission mode corresponding to the background image. Incidentally, although not shown in the characteristic portion 135SG, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker The lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode (for example, red with luminance C2) corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decoration pattern, and light emission corresponding to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display. Back to Aspects.

In particular, even in the variable display which is the target of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 40-66 (j)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. Winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C2 and period T2, and silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on image display device 5. FIG.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-68 (m) and 40-68 (n), when it is time to start the ready-to-win effect due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area of the image display device 5 excluding the active display area 135SG005A After 135SG005F is once whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white), the ready-to-win effect is started. In addition, in this characterizing portion 135SG, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the white-out timing, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F blinks with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends.

At the white-out timing, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y finish blinking at the brightness C2 and the cycle T0. . The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are maintained in an extinguished state during the whiteout period, but emit light in a mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect from the timing when the whiteout ends. .

Also, during the white-out period, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In other words, during the whiteout period, neither sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and there is no sound. At the same time that the attack lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d start emitting light according to the ready-to-win effect (lighting with the brightness C1), the output of the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, which is the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, starts from the speakers 8L and 8R. . It should be noted that, as the ready-to-win effect corresponding sound in the characteristic portion 135SG, BGM or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound may be output so that the player can recognize that the ready-to-win effect (the ready-to-win effect of super reach) is being executed. Just do it.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG, FIGS. As shown in D), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light before the display of the pending display is completed, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect. . Furthermore, it has a winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the first light emitting means of the present invention, and a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c and a movable body lamp 9d as the second light emitting means of the present invention. As shown in 40-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at a brightness of C1 and a period of T1 during the execution period of the first winning flash presentation, and has a brightness of C2 and a cycle during the execution period of the latter winning flash presentation. While flashing at T2, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d flash at the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize winning, and at the time of the second prize winning. During the execution period of the flash effect, it flashes at the brightness C2 and the period T0, so during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, not only the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning but also the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c. The movable body lamp 9d also blinks at the brightness C1 and the period T1, so that the winning flash effect can be made more conspicuous. It's becoming

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, when a new starting prize is generated during variable display, whether or not the flash effect at the time of winning is executed and whether or not the pending display notice effect is executed are targeted for the pending memory based on the start winning. is determined, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be possible to determine whether or not to execute the flash effect at the time of winning and whether or not to execute the pending display notice effect for the reserved storage based on. Specifically, when a new start winning occurs during the variable display, the specific display display start effect A or the specific display display start effect B is displayed in the active display area 135SG005A with the display pattern α to the display pattern γ (holding display notice After executing the appearance animation of the active display of either the display pattern in the case of non-execution of the effect or the display pattern in the case of execution of the pending display notice effect), the active display is displayed as a specific display rotating display effect. The rotating display may be executed, and the winning flash effects (early winning flash effects and late winning flash effects) may be executed based on the start of the variable display based on the start winning.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 40-15, 40-30 (D) to 40-32 (H), and 40-49 (B) to 40-50 (D), the specific display display start effect is 40-15, FIGS. 40-30(D) to 40-32(H), and FIGS. 40-49(B) to 40 As shown in -50 (D), it is displayed as a suspended display and a rotating animation, and as shown in FIGS. , the rotation animation of the hold display is started, so that the player's attention to the hold display can be increased.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-29 (A) to 40-32 (H), when the specific display display start effect B is executed, from the timing before the start of display of the pending display, flash effect at the time of winning Winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c and movable body lamp 9d emit light, so that winning flash performance can be made more conspicuous. 40-49(A) to 40-50(D), even when the specific display display start effect A is executed, the flash effect at the time of winning is started from the timing before the start of display of the pending display. Since the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attack lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light, the winning flash performance can be made more conspicuous.

Further, the execution period of the specific display start effect A is 0.2 seconds, and the execution period of the specific display display start effect B is 1.2 seconds. As shown in FIG. 40-50(D), since the win-time flash effect starts before the end timing of the specific display display start effect A, the display pattern of the pending display is any of the display patterns α to γ. Even so, since the win-time flash performance can be started before the specific display display start performance ends, the player can surely recognize the pending display targeted for the win-time flash performance.

Also, as shown in Figure 40-28, Figure 40-29 (A), Figure 40-29 (B), Figure 40-49 (A), and Figure 40-49 (B), when winning based on the start winning When it is decided to execute the flash effect, the player turns off the winning flash effect lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d once to turn off the winning flash effect. recognizable.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, when it is decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start winning, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attack lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are once turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when it is determined to execute the winning flash effect based on the start winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame The lamp 9b, the attack lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light at a luminance lower than the previous luminance (for example, if the luminance was C2 until then, C3 is lower than the luminance C2). You can change it. In other words, the ``low luminance state'' in the present invention includes a state in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light with low luminance, and in addition to the state in which they are turned off. It also includes a state in which the light is on (a state in which light is not emitted).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-29(A) to 40-48(n) and 40-49(A) to 40-68(n), the notice effect is being executed during the variable display. Winning flash effect can be executed depending on whether or not it is being executed, and the speakers 8L and 8R execute the winning flash effect during execution of the variable display as shown in FIG. 40-29(B). When doing so, the sound corresponding to the variable display is output at the volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at the volume V1 (V1>V2), and when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed during the execution of the notice effect, The sound corresponding to the advance notice performance is output at the volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning is output at the volume V1 (V1>V2). Therefore, even if the sound corresponding to the variable display or the sound corresponding to the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning can be output so that the player can easily hear the flash effect at the time of winning. By outputting the corresponding sound, the player can easily recognize the execution of the flash presentation at the time of winning.

In this feature part 135SG, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output with priority over the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display, and the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is set to volume V1 from the speakers 8L and 8R. , and the sound corresponding to the announcement effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display are output at the volume V2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is the sound corresponding to the announcement effect. As a form of outputting with priority over the sound corresponding to the variable display, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at volume V2, and the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display are output at a volume lower than V2. (For example, volume V3) may be output.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, an example has been exemplified in which the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output with priority over the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display body, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not necessary to output the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning with priority over the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display body. Specifically, when the advance notice effect is started during execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning or the sound corresponding to the variable display is being output from the speakers 8L and 8R), the winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is performed. Output of the sound corresponding to the hour flash effect may be temporarily stopped and only the sound corresponding to the variable display and the sound corresponding to the notice effect may be output, or only one of the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the change display may be output. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the player's difficulty in hearing the sound corresponding to the announcement effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display due to the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning.

Also, as shown in Figure 40-28, Figure 40-29 (A) to Figure 40-32 (H), Figure 40-49 (A) to Figure 40-50 (D), at the time of winning according to the start winning When the execution of the flash effect is determined, after the winning flash effect corresponding sound is started to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is started and the appearance animation of the pending display is completed. Therefore, by outputting the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, it is possible for the player to quickly recognize that the occurrence of the start winning and the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning is decided, so that the interest in the game is improved. can.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, after the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning starts to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, blinking of the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F starts and the appearance animation of the pending display is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is started to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the pending display animation are started. You may do so.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the latter term, the flash at the time of prize is flashed. By blinking the winning lamp 135SG009F at a brightness C2 (C1>C2), at least the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at a brightness C1 so that the player can recognize the start of the winning flash effect. It is possible to prevent the lamp 135SG009F for flashing at the time of winning from flickering at the brightness C1 even during the execution period of the flashing at the time of winning at the later stage, which hinders other performances and lowers the interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 40-28, in this characterizing section 135SG, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1 and the period T2 as the first winning flash effect, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes as the latter winning flash effect. is blinked at a luminance C2 that is lower than the luminance C1 and a period T2 that is longer than the period T1 as a "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis". In other words, the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the late winning flash effect of the characteristic portion 135SG is a low-speed flashing mode with a low degree of emphasis due to the slow flashing speed (long flashing cycle). and a low luminance mode in which the degree of emphasis is low due to the low luminance. Only one of the low-speed flashing mode and the low-brightness mode may be used as the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the lamp 135SG009F.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40-28, the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning is the period in which the variable display before the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, and the period during which the flash effect at the time of winning is executed. Since the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2 throughout the start of the variable display, which is the target of the winning flash effect, the target It becomes easy for the player to recognize that the display is variable, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40-28, the image display device 5 displays the effect image 135SG005E during the execution period of the flash effect for the first prize, and the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the flash effect for the second prize. By displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, so that the player can recognize the start of the flash effect at the time of winning. During the execution period of the flash performance at the time of the late prize winning, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 so that the image display device 5 continues to display the effect image 135SG005E, thereby hindering other displays and enhancing the enjoyment of the game. decrease can be suppressed.

In particular, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the effect image 135SG005E is brighter than the silhouette image 135SG005S, as shown in FIGS. Since the effect image 135SG005E is displayed in color and the display area of the image display device 5 is wide, the player can effectively recognize the start of the winning flash effect by displaying the effect image 135SG005E.

Also, as shown in FIG. 40-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the prize is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the second prize. Then, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8l and 8R at a volume V2 (V1>V2). In this way, by outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect at the volume V1 as the winning flash effect, the player can easily recognize that the winning flash effect has started. At the same time, during the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning in the latter period, the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning is output at the volume V2, thereby preventing the deterioration of the game interest due to the other performance being hindered by the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning. can be suppressed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, during execution of the flash effect at the time of the latter period, by outputting the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2, other effects are hindered by the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning. Although the mode for suppressing the decline in game interest has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and by not outputting the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the late winning, other effects will be performed at the time of winning. It is also possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game due to being hindered by the sound corresponding to the flash effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-29(A) to 40-48(n), during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize, before the start of the variable display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize. During the symbol determination period of the variable display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues blinking, that is, the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol determination command (the determination command reception flag is set) or not, or variable Regardless of whether the display time timer has timed out or not, the player can be controlled to the jackpot game state by continuously executing the blinking of the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F even during the pattern fixing period. can be accurately maintained until the start of the variable display, which is the object of the flash performance at the time of winning, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, as the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are set in accordance with the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term (brightness C1 and cycle T1), and after the end of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning is turned on as the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term according to the flash effect at the time of winning (luminance C2 and cycle T2). ), while the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are caused to emit light in a manner (luminance C2 and period T0) corresponding to the background image, but the present invention has been exemplified. is not limited to this, the effect control CPU 120 clears the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous term at the timing when the flash effect at the time of the previous term ends, so that during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the latter term It may be possible to prevent the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d from emitting light in accordance with the previous winning flash effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40-3, a small pattern 135SG005M is arranged at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. During the period, the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped, so even if the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to emit light during the pattern fixing period, the small pattern 135SG005M is derived in combination indicating a failure. Since it is displayed, the player can be made to recognize that it is during the pattern fixing period.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40-33 (J) and the like, during execution of the winning flash effect, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while the small Since the symbol 135SG005M is displayed at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, the overlapping display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the small symbol 135SG005M makes it difficult for the player to recognize the end of the variable display. You can prevent it from slipping.

Further, in this characteristic portion 135SG, it is possible to execute a pseudo-continuous effect including temporary stop and re-variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 during the variable display, and variable display during execution of the flash effect at the time of winning. In the case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed, when the decorative pattern temporarily stops, the special pattern (see FIGS. 40-40 etc.) that stops in the “middle” decorative pattern display area 5C is a silhouette as a flash effect at the time of winning Since the image 135SG005S can be displayed in an overlapping manner, the special pattern is hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S, so that the player can be given unexpectedness and enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 40-28 and 40-42(a) to 40-47(l), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the variable display is the object of the flash effect when winning, and the interest of the variable display which is the object of the flash effect when winning is improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 40-28, during the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2 before the start of the ready-to-win effect. At the start timing, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and as shown in FIG. 40-22, the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is time to start the ready-to-win effect of the variable display of the effect target due to the generation of static electricity or the like. If it is not possible, at the end timing of the variable display (the reception timing of the pattern confirmation command), which is the timing after the start timing of the ready-to-win effect, the flash effect at the time of winning including the flashing of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning again. is ended, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect does not end at the start timing of the ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 40-22, when the effect control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is time to start the ready-to-win effect of the variable display of the effect object due to the generation of static electricity, etc., the effect control CPU 120 confirms the pattern. Since the flash effect at the time of winning is ended based on the reception of the command, it is possible to further reduce the sense of incongruity at the time of ending the light emission of the flash effect at the time of winning 135SG009F as the flash effect at the time of winning.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 40-21, when the start winning to the first starting opening occurs during the execution of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is not decided, so the ready-to-win effect of super ready to reach. It is possible to prevent a decrease in amusement due to a decrease in attention to the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40-17, in this characteristic portion 135SG, the pending display or the active display can be displayed in any one of display patterns α to display patterns γ that differ in the degree of expectation of a big hit, and as shown in FIG. As shown, when it is decided to display the pending display or the active display in the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S flashes the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect or the game effect. Regardless of the light emission mode of the lamps 9 and the like, the light is emitted in a color corresponding to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ from the occurrence of the starting winning to the end of the variable display based on the starting winning. can also be recognized by the light emitting mode (light emitting color) of the starting port lamp 135SG009S, so the amusement of the game can be improved.

The features of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these features, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. be

For example, the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the characterizing portion 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is during the pattern fixing period (while the variable display is stopped) or not, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 40-69 to 40-89 as a modified example 135SG-1, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the light emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the silhouette The display of the image 135SG005S and the like may not be performed during the design determination period.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 40-69 and 40-70 (A), during execution of the variable display, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of decorative patterns, and the speakers 8L and 8R , the sound corresponding to the variable display is output at volume V2. Further, during the execution of the variable display, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is lit, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes at the cycle T0 corresponding to the variable display (FIGS. 40-27(A) to 40-27 Blinking in the mode shown in (D)) is controlled.

Further, during execution of the variable display, during the execution period of the notice effect, an image corresponding to the effect pattern of the notice effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound corresponding to the production pattern (preliminary production corresponding sound) is output at volume V2. In addition, as reserved memory, there are three first special figure reserved memories (three reserved indications are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

During such a variable display, if a prize is awarded to the first start port (start prize), and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start prize, FIG. As shown in 40-69 and FIG. 40-70(B), the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started.

First, as shown in FIG. 40-69 and FIG. 40-70 (B), the flash effect corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to volume V1 (V1>V2). At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are once turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-69, 40-71(C), and 40-71(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed around the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the period T1. In addition, in the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

Further, when the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term is started, as shown in FIGS. , an animation is displayed in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F which is controlled to blink, and an animation is displayed in which the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. Then, after the character A has moved to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the reserved display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D (in the case of this modification 135SG-1, the fourth An animation that attacks (acts) is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect (previous winning flash effect) being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the acting position. Appearance animation is displayed (see FIGS. 40-20 (D-1) to 40-20 (D-5)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D is completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

That is, in the present modification 135SG-1, when a start winning occurs during the variable display, and execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the start winning, from the completion of display of the pending display based on the starting win. First, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. It should be noted that the appearance animation of the reserved display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect B in this modification 135SG-1 is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter period (FIGS. 40-73 (G) and See Figure 40-73 (H)).

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the later stage, as shown in FIGS. 40-69, 40-73 (G) and 40-73 (H), the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2. At the time of winning, the flash lamp 135SG009F blinks with the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 (cycle T2>cycle T1), and the game effect lamp 9 except the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y blinks with the brightness C2 and the cycle T2. Blinking (blinking in the manner shown in FIGS. 40-27(A) to 40-27(D)), the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 at regular intervals starts to be displayed.

The blinking of the game effect lamps 9 other than the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y with the brightness C2 and the period T2 is determined according to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image, gradation in bluish colors, gradation in reddish colors if the background image is an evening image, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1, but is shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2 >T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

40-74(I) and 40-74(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is excluded. A silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which a black image 135SG005B having transparency is displayed in an overlapping manner over the entirety of one display area 135SG005F.

As shown in FIGS. 40-74 (J), 40-75 (K) and 40-75 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design confirmation command, the image display device 5 The symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the outputs of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R are stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-69, 40-76 (M) and 40-76 (N), during the symbol fixing period from the end timing of the variable display to the start timing of the next variable display, the second stage The output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as the winning flash effect and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are stopped, and the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b and the attacker lamp 9c are movable. Only the flashing of the body lamp 9d in accordance with the background image displayed on the image display device 5 continues.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted rightward by one. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 40-75(K) to 40-82(Z), in the variable display before the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, the speaker 8L as the late winning flash effect, While the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from 8R at volume V2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F with brightness C2 and period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed, During the design fixing period, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is output at the volume V2 as the flash effect at the time of winning, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning flashes with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image is displayed. The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the device 5 is never executed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 40-79 (S) to 40-81 (X), in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (FIG. 40-81 ( Refer to W) In this variation 135SG-1, decorative patterns showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative design display areas 5L and 5R, and a special design that notifies the temporary stop in the middle decorative design display area 5C. is temporarily stopped), as the flash effect for the late winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect for winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is output at a volume V2, the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize flashes with a brightness of C2 and a period of T2, and an image is displayed. Display of silhouette image 135SG005S on device 5 is executed.

In FIG. 40-81(W), during execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. Although the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 is not executed, depending on the timing of the temporary stop, even during the temporary stop of the decoration pattern, the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning blinking is executed. That is, in the modification 135SG-1, for the variable display preceding the variable display to which the flash effect for winning is to be performed, the flash effect for winning is continuously executed during the temporary stop period of the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 40-82 (Y) and 40-82 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is lost in response to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect ends, the image display device 5 displays the decoration pattern and the small display. The symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the outputs of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R are stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing portion 135SG is also executed during the pattern fixing period of the variable display that is out of normal reach. That is, as shown in FIGS. 40-82 (Y) and 40-82 (Z), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 while the black image 135SG005B is overlapped and displayed even during the design determination period. At the same time, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 40-81 (W) and 40-81 (X), while the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbols 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop. Therefore, the player can recognize that the variable display is not finished yet by visually recognizing the variable display of the small pattern 135SG005M.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-83(a) and 40-83(b), when the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. A suspended display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIGS. 40-84(c) to 40-88(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period is continuously executed. Also, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 40-84(d) and 40-85(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 40-86(g) to 40-87(j). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 40-87 (j)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. Winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks with brightness C2 and period T2, and silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on image display device 5. FIG.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-89 (m) and 40-89 (n), when it is time to start the ready-to-win effect due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 After 135SG005F is once whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white), the ready-to-win effect is started. It should be noted that, in this modified example 135SG-1, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the white-out timing, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F blinks with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends. On the other hand, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, and the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 except for the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the brightness C2 and the period T0 are continued.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 40-69, when the start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and the execution of the holding display notice effect is determined based on the start winning, the start lamp light emitting effect is From the start winning timing, the starting port lamp 135SG009S changes color according to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect (for example, if the display pattern of the pending display is the display pattern β, it is blue, and the display pattern of the pending display is the display pattern γ). red) to start emitting light.

The light emission of the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S is an effect that is executed completely independently of the flash effect at the time of winning described above. Light emission in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is continued until the target variable display of the start lamp light emission effect (the target variable display of the flash effect at the time of winning) ends from the time of winning.

As described above, in the modification 135SG-1, when the winning flash effect is started based on the start winning, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is stopped as the late winning flash effect during the symbol fixing period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the variable display is being executed by continuously turning on the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the late winning flash effect during the pattern fixing period. ing. Furthermore, during the temporary stop period of the variable display decoration pattern which is the target of the winning flash effect and the temporary stop period of the variable display decorative pattern which is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is provided. By continuing the blinking of the brightness C2 and the period T2, it is possible to prevent the game from erroneously recognizing that the variable display has ended even though the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped.

In this modified example 135SG-1, during the pattern fixing period during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output, the flash effect at the time of winning of the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning 135SG009F, the flash effect at the time of winning, and the silhouette Although the form of stopping the display of the image 135SG005S is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the player is executing the variable display during the symbol fixing period during the execution period of the flash effect for the late winning. If it is possible to prevent misunderstanding that it is, any one of the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the lighting of the flash effect at the time of winning of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S Or you may make it perform only two.

Further, in this modification 135SG-1, during the period during which the flash effect for the late winning is executed, the sound corresponding to the flash effect for the winning is output as the flash effect for the late winning, the lighting for the flash for winning the prize 135SG009F, and the silhouette. Although the embodiment in which the image 135SG005S is not displayed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning flash as the late winning flash effect is executed during the symbol fixing period during the execution period of the late winning flash effect. As a form of not executing the output of the sound corresponding to the effect, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc., for example, the effect control CPU 120 receives the pattern confirmation command during the execution of the late winning flash effect. Based on this, by clearing the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning, during the pattern fixing period, the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning as the flash performance at the time of winning is output, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning is emitted, The silhouette image 135SG005S may not be displayed.

In this case, the effect control CP 120 selects the flash effect process table for the late winning and resets and starts the process timer for the flash effect for the late winning, based on the reception of the first variable display start command. By doing so, the late winning flash effect (output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect, emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and display of the silhouette image 135SG005S) may be started in response to the start of the new variable display.

In addition, as a form in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the late winning flash effect is not executed during the pattern fixing period during the execution period of the late winning flash effect, for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to perform the late winning flash effect. Based on the reception of the pattern confirmation command during execution of the performance, the lighting control data corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning is not sent to the lamp control board 14, but the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F. Lighting control data for maintaining light-off (for example, "0:0:0" indicating light-off as RGB values of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F) may be continuously output until a variable display start command is received. .

In addition, if the late winning flash effect is not executed during the pattern fixing period, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect will be output again from the start timing of the new variable display, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the silhouette image will be performed. The display of 135SG005S may be re-executed from the beginning of each cycle (see FIGS. 40-69), or from the start timing of the new variable display, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the lighting of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S may be restarted from the middle of each cycle.

In addition, in this variation 135SG-1, if the variable display ends during the execution of the flash effect for the late winning, during the pattern fixing period of the variable display, the flash effect for the late winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is displayed. While the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning and the display of the silhouette image 235SG005S are stopped, according to the background image displayed on the image display device 5 of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d However, the present invention is not limited to this. Blinking may also stop. In particular, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d stop blinking during the design confirmation period. The body lamp 9d may be turned off, or the in-lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d may be turned off in a certain color (for example, the background displayed on the image display device 5) during the design fixing period. The color corresponding to the image) may be maintained in a continuously lit state.

Further, in the characteristic portion 135SG, as the explanation of FIG. 40-8, it was described that a plurality of ready-to-reach effects may be provided as a ready-to-reach effect of super reach. is provided, the hit expectations are different between the reach effects of a plurality of super reach (for example, as the reach effects of super reach, the reach effect of super reach α and the reach effect of the super reach α). A reach effect with a high super reach β may be provided).

In particular, when it is possible to execute a plurality of super reach performances with different jackpot expectations, as shown in FIGS. , the movable body 32 can be moved between a retracted position (e.g., an upper position of the image display device 5) and an effect position (e.g., a center front position when viewed from the front of the image display device 5), and a winning flash effect. If the target variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach α (variable display for executing a reach effect of super reach α), the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 during the variable display is During the period when the first display area 135SG005F excluding the first display area 135SG005F is once whited out, the movable body 32 is repeatedly moved between the retracted position and the retracted position (for example, the intermediate position between the retracted position and the performance position described above). Executes a movable body action suggestive effect that suggests moving to the effect position, and the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach β (Super Reach β reach effect is executed variable display), the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is temporarily whited out. A movable body motion presentation may be executed to move from the position to the presentation position.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the action of the movable body 32 during the whiteout period, and when the movable body 32 moves to the presentation position (when the movable body action presentation is executed). can inform the player that the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win β, which has a higher expectation for big hit than the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win α, will be executed by the movable body operation performance, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, when the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach α, as shown in FIGS. When the variable display is started, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is started. In addition, in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period is continuously executed. Furthermore, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 40-91(B), 40-92(C), and 40-92(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 40-93(E) to 40-94(H). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display that is the object of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 40-94 (H)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R emit light. Winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C2 and period T2, and silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on image display device 5. FIG.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-95 (I) to 40-96 (L), when it is time to start the ready-to-win effect due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area of the image display device 5 excluding the active display area 135SG005A 135SG005F is temporarily whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white). It should be noted that, in this modified example 135SG-2, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

As shown in FIGS. 40-90 (A) and FIGS. 40-96 (K) to 40-97 (N), during the whiteout period, at the start timing of the movable body motion suggestive presentation, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 ends. Then, as the movable body motion suggesting effect, the movable body motion suggesting effect is based on the fact that the movable body 32 is repeatedly reciprocated between the retracted position and the suggested position by a drive mechanism (not shown) a predetermined number of times (four reciprocations in this modification 135SG-2). ends, the white-out period also ends. In addition, during the execution period of the movable body action suggesting effect, the sound corresponding to the movable body action suggesting effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 instead of the sound corresponding to the variable display. As the sound corresponding to the effect suggesting the action of the movable body, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "rattling") that enables the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retracted position and the suggesting position ), etc., should be output.

As shown in FIGS. 40-90(A), 40-98(O) and 40-98(P), from the timing when the movable body motion suggesting effect and the whiteout are completed, the image display device 5 starts superimposing Along with the start of the ready-to-win effect of reach α, lighting of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts with the brightness C1 corresponding to the ready-to-win effect. Then, from the speakers 8L and 8R, output of a ready-to-win effect corresponding sound (BGM or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound) corresponding to the ready-to-win effect of the super reach α is started.

In addition, when the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of super reach β, as shown in FIGS. When the variable display is started, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is started. In addition, in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period is continuously executed. Furthermore, during the variable display, there are cases where the advance notice effect is executed (see FIGS. 40-99(B), 40-100(C), and 40-100(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 40-101(E) to 40-102(H). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 40-102 (H)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. Winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks with brightness C2 and period T2, and silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on image display device 5. FIG.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-103(I) to 40-104(L), when the ready-to-win effect starts due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 135SG005F is temporarily whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white). It should be noted that, in this modified example 135SG-2, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

As shown in FIGS. 40-90(B) and FIGS. 40-104(K) to 40-105(N), during the white-out period, at the start timing of the movable body motion suggestive presentation, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 ends. Then, as the movable body motion suggesting effect, the movable body motion is suggested based on the fact that the movable body 32 is repeatedly reciprocated a predetermined number of times (four reciprocations in this modification 135SG-2) between the retracted position and the suggested position by a drive mechanism (not shown). The performance ends. In addition, during the execution period of the movable body motion suggesting effect, the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggesting effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 instead of the sound corresponding to the variable display. As the sound corresponding to the effect suggesting the action of the movable body, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "rattling") that enables the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retracted position and the suggesting position ), etc., should be output.

After the movable body action suggestive rendering ends, as shown in FIGS. 40-90(B) and FIGS. , the movable body 32 is moved from the retracted position to the performance position by a drive mechanism (not shown). It should be noted that during the period of the movable body motion presentation, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are set at the brightness C1 according to the movable body motion presentation. Light. Also, although not shown in FIG. 40-90(B), the sound corresponding to the movable object motion presentation is output at volume V1 from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIG. 40-106(P)). As the sound corresponding to the motion of the movable body in the characterizing portion 135SG, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "boom") that enables the player to recognize that the movable body has moved may be output.

Then, as shown in FIG. 40-107(Q), the movable body action rendering ends when the movable body 32 returns from the rendering position to the retracted position. As shown in FIGS. 40-90(B), 40-107(Q), and 40-107(R), from the timing when the movable body motion effect and the whiteout are completed, the image display device 5 starts super reach. At the same time that the ready-to-win effect of β is started, lighting of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F with the luminance C1 corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is started. , the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting a ready-to-win effect corresponding sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect of the super reach [beta]. As the reach effect corresponding sound corresponding to the reach effect of super reach β, a variable display corresponding sound and the reach effect of super reach α are used so that the player can recognize that the reach effect of super reach β is being executed. BGM or the like that is different from the ready-to-win effect corresponding sound corresponding to the effect may be output.

As described above, in the present modification 135SG-2, in the variable display of super ready-to-win, which is the object of the flash effect for winning, the lamp for flash for winning 135SG009F is set to brightness C2 and period T2 before the start of the ready-to-win effect for super ready-to-win. , and from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit with the brightness C2. Since light is emitted (lighting with luminance C2) in a manner corresponding to the ready-to-win effect instead of blinking at the cycle T2, the game interest of the ready-to-win effect can be improved.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 40-96(K) to 40-98(O) and FIGS. 40-104(K) to 40-106(O), the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white (white out). In addition, during the white-out period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is extinguished, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit at the brightness C2 from the subsequent start timing of the reach performance of the super reach. Since it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the change in the light emission mode of the lamp 135SG009F, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, when the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach β, the movable body motion suggesting effect is executed during the whiteout period, and the movable body motion suggesting effect is executed. , the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is extinguished according to the execution of , and thereafter, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on according to the execution of the movable body action effect (moving the movable body 32 to the effect position). It lights up with the brightness C1 in a corresponding manner. In other words, the light emission mode of the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on at the brightness C1 after turning off due to the execution of the effect suggesting the operation of the movable body. Since this can be prevented, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 135SG, a form in which the dialogue announcement effect can be executed as an announcement effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit during the variable display has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , As a modification 135SG-3, as the notice effect, in addition to the dialogue notice effect, the image displayed on the image display device 5 changes in stages, and a big hit is expected according to the final number of change steps. A step-up effect with different degrees, a group announcement effect in which a group of characters crosses the image display device 5, or the like may be executed.

In particular, when the step-up effect can be executed as the modification 135SG-3, as shown in FIGS. When the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the flash effect is not executed, the timing for displaying the image (step-up image) on the image display device 5 or the timing for changing the image step by step is used for the winning flash. By temporarily lighting the lamp 135SG009F with the brightness C2, the effect of the step-up effect may be enhanced. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 40-108(B), 40-114(A) to 40-118(F), the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the winning flash effect is being executed. At this time, since the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has already flashed with the brightness C2 and the period T2, the timing for displaying an image (step-up image) on the image display device 5 and the image are changed step by step. The winning flash lamp 135SG009F is not turned on at the timing, that is, during the execution of the winning flash performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is already emitting light in a manner corresponding to the winning flash performance, is turned on according to the step-up performance. You may make it not emit light in the mode.

As described above, in the modification 135SG-3, when the step-up effect is started in the variable display during execution of the flash effect for winning, that is, the lamp for flash for winning 135SG009F has the brightness C2 as the flash effect for winning. In addition, when the step-up effect of turning on the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is started in the state of blinking at the cycle T2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F from starting lighting in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect from inappropriate timing such as the end timing of the win-time flash effect.

Further, in the characterizing part 135SG, the movable body 32 is not operated before the start of the ready-to-win effect of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. 2, the movable body motion rendering can be executed to move the movable body 32 from the retracted position (eg, the position above the image display device 5) to the rendering position (eg, the center front position in the front view of the image display device 5). By doing so, the player may be notified that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed.

In this way, when the movable body action effect can be executed before the reach effect of super reach, as shown in FIGS. When the winning flash effect is executed for the variable display of the super reach, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the lighting mode corresponding to the movable body operation effect. The degree of expectation for a big hit may differ depending on which one of the light emitting modes according to the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win is changed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 40-119(C), when the variable display result of the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is a big hit, at the start of the variable display, 70% of the movable body It is decided to change the light emission mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize from the mode corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning to the light emission mode corresponding to the motion representation of the movable body from the operation performance start timing, and the ready-to-win performance is started at a rate of 30%. From the timing, it is determined to change the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect. Then, if the variable display result of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is a failure, at the start of the variable display, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F is displayed at a rate of 30% from the start timing of the movable body operation effect. It is decided to change the light emission mode from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body motion effect, and the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed at a rate of 70% from the ready-to-win effect start timing. is changed from a mode corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning to a light emission mode corresponding to the ready-to-win performance.

In addition, if it is decided to change the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the lighting mode corresponding to the movable body operation effect or the light emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, the decision is made. and control the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer according to the progress of the variable display.

As described above, in the present modification 135SG-4, depending on the timing of ending the lighting mode corresponding to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the execution period of the movable body motion effect is Since it may be during the execution period of ready-to-win performance, the game determines whether the end timing of the flash performance at the time of winning is during the execution period of moving body action performance or during the execution period of super-ready-to-win performance. easy for people to recognize. In particular, as shown in FIG. 40-119(C), the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode according to the winning flash effect to the start timing of the movable body motion effect according to the movable body motion effect. Since the degree of expectation for a big hit is different between the case of using the lighting mode and the case of using the lighting mode according to the ready-to-win performance from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the end timing of the flash performance at the time of winning. It is possible to improve the amusement interest of the game.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-4, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect ends (the light emitting mode changes to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body operation effect or the light emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect) timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and according to the timing when the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect ends, the pachinko game The setting value set in the machine 1 may be suggested. By doing so, it is also possible to draw the player's attention to the end timing of the flash effect at the time of winning, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-4, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F emits light either at the start of the movable body action effect during the variable display that is the object of the win-time flash effect or at the start of the ready-to-win effect of super reach. The mode can be changed, and the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be changed from the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect to the lighting mode according to the movable body motion effect from the start timing of the movable body motion effect. Since the degree of expectation for a big hit differs between the start timing of the ready-to-win performance and the light emission mode corresponding to the ready-to-win performance, the player pays attention to the performance executed at the timing when the light-emitting mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F changes at the time of winning. It is possible to make it possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-4, in the super reach variable display, the movable body action effect can be executed before the start of the super reach reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, before the execution of the movable body motion rendering, a movable body motion suggesting rendering that suggests the execution of the movable body motion rendering may be executed. In this way, when the movable body action suggesting effect can be executed before the execution of the movable body action effect, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect to the movable body motion suggesting effect. A case is provided in which the light emission mode is changed from the start timing of the performance to the light emission mode corresponding to the motion suggestive performance of the movable body, and the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning to the motion suggestive performance of the movable body motion. The degree of expectation for a big hit may be different between the case of setting the light emission mode according to the movable body operation suggesting performance from the start timing and the case of setting the light emission mode according to the ready-to-win performance from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect executed when the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in this modification 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission corresponding to the movable body motion suggesting effect from the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect. A mode is exemplified in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is different between the case of the mode and the case of the light emission mode according to the ready-to-win effect from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prize is won. The light emission (blinking) of the hour flash lamp 135SG009F is terminated at the start timing of the movable body operation suggestive presentation and at the start timing of the ready-to-win presentation, and at which timing the light emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of prize winning is provided. The degree of expectation for a big hit may differ depending on whether the game ends with . In this way, even if a plurality of timings are provided for stopping the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect during the variable display of 1, the effect control CPU 120 may not flash the winning flash due to the generation of static electricity or the like. If the flashing of the flashing lamp 135SG009F cannot be stopped, the late winning including the flashing of the flashing lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning again at the end timing of the variable display (the timing of receiving the pattern confirmation command), which is the timing after these timings It suffices to end the time flash effect.

By doing so, even when the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect cannot be finished at the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect or the start timing of the ready-to-win effect, the winning flash effect can be performed. At the end timing of the target variable display, the late winning flash effect including blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be ended.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, as the display patterns of the specific display (reserved display and active display), the display pattern α having the lowest big-hit expectation is a white round shape, and the big-hit expectation is higher than the display pattern α and is blue. and a red round display pattern γ with a higher expectation of a big hit than the display pattern β, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific display As the display pattern, a display pattern other than these display patterns α to γ may be provided.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 40-120 as modification 135SG-5, as the display pattern of the specific display, in addition to the above-described display pattern α to display pattern γ, either display as pending display or active display (Expectation of change to display pattern β or display pattern γ: low) Display pattern δ, which is a round shape with flashing white, can be changed to display pattern β or display pattern γ at the timing of , as a pending display or active display is more likely than display pattern δ to change to display pattern β or display pattern γ at any time during the display of a specific character-shaped circle display pattern ε may be provided.

That is, as the display patterns of the pending display and the active display in the modification 135SG-5, for the display pattern α to the display pattern γ, the display pattern γ (red display) has the highest expectation for a big hit, and the display pattern α (white display ) is set to have the lowest jackpot expectation. On the other hand, with respect to the degree of expectation of a big win for the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε when the display pattern β and the display pattern γ do not change, the degree of expectation for a big win may be set lower than that of the display pattern α. The degree of expectation for a big hit may also be set to be high and lower than that of the display pattern β.

Further, in this modification 135SG-5, as the display patterns for the pending display and the active display, the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε that can change to the display pattern β and the display pattern γ are provided. The display pattern α may also be changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a lower rate than the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε. Further, the suspended display and active display of the display pattern β may also be changed to the display pattern γ.

Further, in the characterizing section 135SG, whether or not execution of the pending display notice effect (display pattern β or display pattern β of the pending display or the active display) and the display pattern are determined as determination of execution of the winning flash effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. may decide.

For example, as shown in FIG. 40-120 as the modification 135SG-5 described above, when it is determined to execute the flash effect at the time of winning based on the time of starting winning, the display mode of the pending display or active display based on the starting winning , the display pattern ε is determined at the highest rate, the display pattern δ is determined at a rate lower than the display pattern ε, the display pattern γ is determined at a rate lower than the display pattern δ, and the display pattern β is determined from the display pattern γ is determined at the lowest rate, and the display pattern α is determined at the lowest rate. Display pattern α).

As described above, display patterns α to ε are provided as display modes of specific displays (suspended display and active display), and when specific displays are displayed in display pattern δ and display pattern ε, the specific display is displayed. Since the ratio of execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is higher than in the case of display in the pattern β or the display pattern γ, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning can draw the player's attention to the specific display and the specific display. Since the player can also be made to pay attention to whether the display changes from the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, the display pattern α is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in a white circle, the display pattern β is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in a blue circle, and the display pattern γ is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in a red circle. Since the display pattern and the display pattern δ are display patterns in which the specific display is displayed in a circle that blinks in white, the player can easily identify the difference in the specific display by the display color and blinking mode.

In this modification 135SG-5, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, the display pattern of the specific display is changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern depending on whether or not the flash effect at the time of winning is executed. Although the rate of change to the pattern γ is not described, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, flash effects are displayed at the time of winning. The rate at which the display pattern of the specific display changes to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ may differ depending on whether or not it is executed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the winning flash effect is being executed when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, so that the interest in the game is improved. can.

In this modification 135SG-5, the display pattern δ blinking in white was exemplified as a special aspect of the specific display in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific display in the present invention. The special mode (display pattern δ) may be a color (for example, purple, black, etc.) other than white, blue, and red, which are the normal mode and special mode of the specific display in the present invention.

Further, in this variation 135SG-5, by displaying the specific display in the display pattern δ, the specific display is exemplified to change to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. The present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to execute an action rendering that can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ. .

In particular, in the case of action effects, a plurality of effects modes ( For example, a first action effect that can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ, and the first effect effect have different effects. A second effect effect that can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a higher rate than the first effect effect by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ is provided. When the second effect performance is executed, the win-time flash performance may be executed at a higher rate than when the first effect performance is executed.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the effect effect is executed by the first effect effect or the second effect effect, and by executing the win-time flash effect, the effect effect is changed to the second effect effect. It is possible to heighten the sense of expectation for execution in the action presentation.

In addition, in the present modification 135SG-5, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern ε, the ratio of execution of the win-time flash effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ. is high, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern ε and the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the change of the display pattern of the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ will cause the player to be dissuaded. Since it is possible to attract attention, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

Further, in the modified example 135SG-5, a display pattern ε for displaying a character is provided as a display pattern of the specific display (suspended display and active display), and an action effect is executed for the character as the specific display. , the display pattern of the specific display can be changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display pattern of the specific display may be changed to the display pattern β or γ as a result of acting on another character.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 40-121 (A) and 40-121 (B), when the number of the first special figure pending memory is 3 and the display is variable, the first start opening is won When (start winning) occurs, and the display pattern of the hold display based on the start win is determined as the display pattern ε as a hold display notice effect based on the start win, the fourth display pattern ε of the first hold memory display area 135SG005D is displayed. 40-121(B-1), the active display displayed in the active display area 135SG005A changes to the enemy character.

In this state, the variable display is terminated and a new variable display is started, that is, as shown in FIGS. When the friendly character (suspended display of the display pattern ε) moves from the display position of the fourth suspended display to the display position of the third suspended display, the friendly character is displayed in the active display area 135SG005A. act (shoot) against

Next, every time the variable display ends and a new variable display is started, that is, as shown in FIGS. 40-122(C) and 40-122(D), the When the friendly character displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves from the display position of the third reserved display to the display position of the second reserved display, the friendly character displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D When moving from the display position of the display to the display position of the first hold display, the ally character acts (shoots) on the enemy character displayed in the active display area 135SG005A.

Furthermore, when the variable display ends and the variable display that is the target of the pending display notice effect is started, the ally character displayed at the display position of the first pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D is displayed in the active state. It moves to the area 135SG005A, and the ally character directly acts on the enemy character in the active display area 135SG005A (a battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character is executed).

Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-123(G) and 40-123(H), when the friendly character wins as a result of the battle effect, the friendly character is displayed in the display pattern β or It changes to the active display of the display pattern γ. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 40-123(I) and 40-123(J), when the friendly character is defeated as a result of the battle effect, the display pattern of the enemy character or the friendly character is displayed in the active display area 135SG005A. Change to the active display of α.

In this modification 135SG-6, when the pending display is displayed in the display pattern ε, the friendly character as the pending display of the display pattern ε defeats the enemy character in the active display area 135SG005A, thereby causing the active display to occur. Although the display pattern β and display pattern γ can be changed to the active display of the friendly character, the present invention is not limited to this. By defeating the enemy character while the hold display is displayed in the first hold display area 135SG005D, the friend character as the hold display may be changed to the hold display of the display pattern β or the display pattern γ.

Further, when the pending display is displayed by the display pattern ε, the pending display of the display pattern ε is higher in the case where the winning flash effect is executed than in the case where the winning flash effect is not executed. may be changed to the suspended display (or active display) of the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. By doing so, it is possible not only to draw the player's attention to the result of the battle between the ally character and the enemy character as the pending display of the display pattern ε, but also to execute the winning flash effect during the execution of the battle. Since it is possible to attract the player's attention to whether or not the player is present, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the modification 135SG-5 and the modification 135SG-6, the display patterns of the pending display and the active display are the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε in the display pattern α to the display pattern γ described in the characteristic portion 135SG. is added, but when the pending display and the active display are displayed in these display patterns δ and ε, it is the same as when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display patterns α to γ. Then, the specific display display start effect A or the specific display display start effect B may be executed.

More specifically, when the pending display or the active display is displayed in the display pattern δ, the specific display display start effect A (see FIG. 40-19) is executed as in the case of the display pattern α, and the pending display or the active display is executed. is displayed in the display pattern ε, the specific display display start effect B (see FIG. 40-20) or the period during which the display of the pending display or the active display is completed is specified as in the case of the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. A specific display start effect longer than the display start effect A and shorter than the specific display display start effect B may be executed. By doing so, when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε, similar to the characteristic portion 135SG, the timing before the display of the pending display and the active display is completed. , the winning flash effect sound and the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F are recognized by the player.

In addition, in the characterizing section 135SG, as the prize-winning flash effect, a form in which the prize-winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 135SG-7, the display mode of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 may be changed stepwise according to the progress of the winning flash effect.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 40-124 (A) and 40-124 (B), winning a prize to the first start port ( When a start winning) occurs, and execution of the pending display notice effect and execution of the win flash effect are determined based on the start win, as shown in FIG. The performance begins.

First, as shown in FIG. 40-124 (B), as the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is started at a volume V1 (V1>V2). , the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are turned off once. Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-125(C) and 40-125(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5, and the winning flash Flashing control of the control lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the period T1. In addition, in the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

In addition, when the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started, as shown in FIGS. , an animation is displayed in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F which is controlled to blink, and an animation is displayed in which the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. After the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the reserved display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D (in the case of this feature part 135SG, the fourth reserved An animation that attacks (acts) against the position where the display is displayed is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect (previous winning flash effect) being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the acting position. Appearance animation is displayed (see FIGS. 40-20 (D-1) to 40-20 (D-5)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D is completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As the late winning flash effect, as shown in FIGS. 40-127 (G) and 40-127 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R is started at volume V2. , Blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F with brightness C2 and cycle T2 (cycle T2 > cycle T1), game effect lamp 9 excluding stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y with brightness C2 and blinking with cycle T2 (Fig. 40- 27(A) to FIG. 40-27(D)), the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals. be.

The blinking of the game effect lamps 9 other than the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y with the brightness C2 and the period T2 is determined according to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image, gradation in bluish colors, gradation in reddish colors if the background image is an evening image, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1, but is shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2 >T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-128(I) and 40-128(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is excluded. A silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which a black image 135SG005B having transparency is displayed in an overlapping manner over the entirety of one display area 135SG005F.

As shown in FIGS. 40-128 (J), 40-129 (K) and 40-129 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design determination command, the image display device 5 The symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the outputs of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R are stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period in this modified example 135SG-7 is executed irrespective of whether it is the symbol fixing period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 40-128(J), the image display device 5 displays the silhouette image 135SG005S in a state where the black image 135SG005B is displayed in an overlapped manner even during the design determination period, and the speakers 8L and 8R output the silhouette image 135SG005S. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at the volume V2.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted rightward by one. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

In the variable display, as shown in FIGS. 40-129(K) and 40-129(L), the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed together with the black image 135SG005B on the image display device 5 is larger than the previous variable display. may be displayed. By displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S larger than the previous variable display in this manner, the silhouette image is displayed in an overlapping manner in the active display area 135SG005A.

As shown in FIGS. 40-130 (M) and 40-130 (N), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design determination command, the combination of the decorative design and the small design 135SG005M on the image display device 5 indicates a failure. Along with the derived display (displayed with the variable display stopped), the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Even during the symbol fixation period, the flash effect at the time of the latter winning is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 40-130(N), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 while the black image 135SG005B is overlapped and displayed even during the pattern fixing period. In particular, the silhouette image 135SG005S is also displayed overlapping the active display area 135SG005A. Also, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at volume V2 from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this modification 135SG-7, one of two silhouette images 135SG005S having different sizes can be displayed as the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning, and a silhouette of a large size can be displayed. When the image 135SG005S is displayed, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A are overlapped and displayed as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a large size silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed. and the active display area 135SG005A may be displayed in an overlapping manner only when the variable display, which is the target of the winning flash effect, is executed. By doing so, the player can easily recognize the variable display corresponding to the flash effect when winning, and the active display area 135SG005A, that is, the active display corresponding to the flash effect when winning can be hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with unexpectedness and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-7, silhouette images 135SG005S having different sizes can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning, and the silhouette images 135SG005S and the silhouette images 135SG005S are active according to the size of the silhouette images 135SG005S to be displayed. Since the overlap mode with the display area 135SG005A is different, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In this modification 135SG-7, depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5, there are cases where the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap and cases where they do not overlap. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the overlapping area between the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A differs depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 (for example, active display A case where only a part of the area 135SG005A overlaps the silhouette image 135SG005S, a case where the entire area of the active display area 135SG005A overlaps the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc.) may be provided.

In addition, in the modification 135SG-7, a case where the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap according to the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 is provided. Before the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it overlaps with the pending display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap with the active display targeted for the flash effect at the time of winning displayed in the active display area 135SG005A during execution of the variable display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. A silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed. By doing so, the player can easily recognize the pending display and the active display corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, and not only the pending display but also the active display can be hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game by further imparting unexpectedness to the game.

In addition, in the modification 135SG-7, only one of the suspension display and the active display is hidden by the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S as the flash effect at the time of winning, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a case may be provided in which both the suspension display and the active display are hidden by the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-7, the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning is exemplified in a form in which the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed in an overlapping manner in the active display area 135SG005A and the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. It is not limited to this, and in the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the variable display during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning as illustrated in the characteristic portion 135SG, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the "intermediate ” (see FIGS. 40-40, etc.) displayed in the decoration symbol display area 5C, the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning may be displayed in an overlapping manner. In this way, the silhouette image 135SG005S as a winning flash effect hides the special pattern for notifying the temporary stop, so that the player can be given unexpectedness and enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-7, as a re-variable display effect in the present invention, a form in which the special pattern stops in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, as a re-variable display effect, the image display device 5 may display an image different from the special symbol, and the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning may be displayed overlapping the image.

Further, in the characterizing section 135SG, when a start winning to the first start opening occurs during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super reach, execution of the flash effect at the time of winning based on the starting win is not determined (determined to be non-execution). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-8, when a start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the variable display, the variable display is specified, and if the specified period is equal to or less than the execution period of the flash presentation at the time of winning, the execution of the flash presentation at the time of winning is not determined (determined to be non-execution). By doing so, when the remaining period of the variable display is short, such as the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term or less, the flash effect at the time of winning (the flash effect at the time of winning the first term) is executed, whereby the flash at the time of winning is performed. It is possible to prevent the specific display (suspended display or active display) of the object of rendering from becoming difficult to understand.

In this variation 135SG-8, whether or not to execute the winning flash effect is exemplified based on the remaining period of the variable display and the execution period of the previous winning flash effect. is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute the winning flash effect depends on a period other than the remaining variable display period and the execution period of the previous winning flash effect (for example, a period of 5 seconds, 10 seconds, etc.) ) may be used as a reference.

Furthermore, in this modification 135SG-8, when a start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the variable display, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and the specified period is the first winning flash effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specified period is less than or equal to the execution period of the first prize flash effect. In this case, on the condition that the variable display result of the variable display is a loss, the win-time flash effect may be executed from the start timing of the next variable display. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win and the flash performance to win a prize due to the redundant execution of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win and the flash performance to win.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, as the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect, blinking with brightness C1 and cycle T1 (light emission mode in the previous winning flash effect) and brightness C2 and cycle T2. blinking (light emission mode in the flash effect at the time of winning a prize later) and two light emission modes are provided. On the other hand, as the light emission mode of the starter lamp 135SG009S in the light emission effect of the starter lamp, blue light emission with a luminance C2 corresponding to the display pattern β and red light emission with a luminance C2 according to the display pattern γ are performed. is provided. That is, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the number of lighting modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect is the same as the number of lighting modes of the starting lamp 135SG009S in the starting lamp lighting effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-9, the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect and the light emission of the starting lamp 135SG009S in the starting lamp light emitting effect The number of modes may be different.

In particular, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-5, a display pattern δ and a display pattern ε are provided as display patterns for the pending display and the active display, and these display patterns δ are used as the lighting mode of the starting lamp 135SG009S in the lighting performance of the starting lamp. and the display pattern ε, even if the number of light emission modes of the starter lamp 135SG009S in the starter lamp light emission effect is greater than the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect. good. By doing so, the variations in light emission of the starter lamp 135SG009S are increased, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 135SG, the win flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as the win flash effect, and the starting lamp 135SG009S emits light in the start lamp light emitting effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 135SG-10, the light emitting area in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as the flash effect at the time of winning may be provided larger than the light emitting area in which the starting lamp 135SG009S emits light as the starting lamp light emitting effect. good.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40-28, in the case where execution of both the winning flash effect and the hold display notice effect is determined based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is set to the winning starting flash effect. After that, it emits light until the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the start winning flash effect, while the starting port lamp 135SG009S emits light until the start timing of the start winning flash effect. Since the light is emitted until the end of the variable display, which is the object of the flash effect, by applying the modification 135SG-10, the light emission corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be performed for an excessively long time. It is possible to maintain the player's expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state by the light emitting mode of the starter lamp 135SG009S while preventing the deterioration of the game interest due to the above.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the form in which the starter lamp 135SG009S emits light without blinking as the starter lamp light emission effect was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the starter lamp is started as the starter lamp light emission effect. The mouth lamp 135SG009S may be blinked. Furthermore, when the starter lamp 135SG009S is flashed as the starter lamp light emission effect in this way, the flashing cycle of the starter lamp 135SG009S is regarded as the flashing cycle (cycle T2) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect. can be different. By making the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the blinking cycle of the starting lamp 135SG009S different in this way, the player pays attention to both the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the blinking of the starting lamp 135SG009S. It is possible to make it possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the characteristic portion 135SG, as shown in FIG. 40-28, when executing the winning flash effect, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, etc. are turned off once. Although it is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as modification 135SG-11, in the case of executing the flash effect at the time of winning, the brightness of the backlight or the like built in the image display device 5 is temporarily changed. may be reduced to reduce the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5, and then the winning flash effect may be started. In this way, when the winning flash performance is executed, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is lowered so that the player can easily recognize the start of the winning flash performance.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-11, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is reduced by reducing the brightness of the backlight or the like built in the image display device 5, that is, the image display Although the form in which the brightness of the device 5 is changed to change the image display device 5 to the low visibility state in which the visibility is lower than that of the previous state has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display device 5 is not limited to this. As a form of reducing the visibility of the image displayed on the display device 5, in addition to reducing the luminance (brightness) of the image display device 5, temporarily stopping the display of the image on the image display device 5, The movable body 32 is operated in front of the image display device 5, the image display device 5 itself is repeatedly operated in vertical directions, etc., and the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is increased to relatively display on the image display device 5. It may be one that lowers the visibility of the image that is displayed.

In other words, the "low visibility state" in the present invention means that if the visibility of the image display device 5 is lower than the previous state, the brightness of the image display device 5 is reduced by a method other than the brightness reduction. Includes images that reduce the visibility of the image.

Further, in the characterizing section 135SG, as shown in FIG. 40-28, when the execution of the winning flash effect is determined according to the start winning, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is started. Although the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking after the win-win flash lamp 135SG009F is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. When the execution is decided, after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the speaker 8L, 8R will output the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect and the animation of the pending display and the active display will be completed. may By doing so, it is possible for the player to quickly recognize that the start winning has occurred by flashing (emission) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and that the execution of the winning flash effect has been decided. It can improve amusement interest.

In this modified example 135SG-12, after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the winning flash effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the pending display and the active display is completed. Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the hold display and An appearance animation of the active display may be started.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 40-28, in the characteristic portion 135SG, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V1, and for the flash effect at the time of winning. Flashing of the lamp 135SG009F with the brightness C1 and the period T1, display of the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period, the volume of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the speakers 8L and 8R Although the output at V2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are each repeatedly executed, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 135SG-13, even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the second term, when the variable display targeted for the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it is the same as during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term. , the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning at the brightness C1 and the period T1, and the display of the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are temporarily executed. You may By doing so, even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is output at the volume V1 as in the case of the flash effect at the time of the previous term, and is for the flash at the time of winning. When the lamp 135SG009F blinks with the brightness C1 and the period T1 and the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, the player recognizes that the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started. Since it can be easily performed, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In this variation 135SG-13, even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the second term, when the variable display for the flash effect at the time of winning is started, the same as during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term, The speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V1, blinks the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning with the brightness C1 and the period T1, and displays the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 temporarily. Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display for the flash effect at the time of winning starts during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning at the later stage, the flash effect at the time of winning by the speakers 8L and 8R is started. Only one or only two of the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the volume V1, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning with the brightness C1 and the period T1, and the display of the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are executed. You may do so.

In addition, as the pachinko game machine 1 of the present specification, the jackpot probability differs according to the set value (FIGS. 31 to 39), and the holding display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning are displayed based on the start winning. It can be executed, and the change in the light emission mode as the winning flash effect differs according to the lamp (characteristic portion 135SG, FIGS. 40-1 to 40-68), and the winning flash effect during the fixed period of the variable display pattern (Modified example 135SG-1, FIGS. 40-69 to 40-89), capable of executing a reach performance of super reach with different expectations for big hits, and moving the movable body before the reach performances with high expectations for big hits. An effect can be executed, and when the movable body action effect is to be executed, the light emission mode of the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is changed to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body action effect from the start timing of the movable body action effect. One (Modification 2, FIGS. 40-90 to 40-107), a step-up effect can be executed during variable display, and when the step-up effect is executed when the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed, flash at the time of winning While the lighting lamp 135SG009F is caused to emit light in a mode corresponding to the step-up performance, when the step-up performance is executed during execution of the winning flash performance, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed to the winning flash performance. (Modification 135SG-3, FIGS. 40-108 to 40-118), which does not change the light emission mode according to the response, can execute the movable body operation effect before the start of the reach effect of super reach, and the lamp for the flash at the time of winning When the light emission mode of 135SG009F changes from the light emission mode according to the flash effect at the time of winning to the light emission mode according to the movable body motion effect from the start timing of the movable body motion effect, and from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect according to the ready-to-win effect. The degree of expectation for a big hit is different depending on whether the lighting mode changes (Modification 135SG-4, FIGS. 40-119), and display patterns α to ε are provided as display modes for pending display and active display. Depending on whether the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined by winning, the ratio of which display pattern is determined as the display pattern of the pending display or the active display is different (Modification 135SG-5, Fig. 40- 120), when the display pattern ε is determined as the display pattern for the pending display, the display pattern ε is changed from the display pattern ε in accordance with the execution of the action effect. A silhouette image that changes from a turn α to a display pattern γ (variant 135SG-6, FIGS. 40-121 to 40-123), and a silhouette image displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the progress of the winning flash effect. 135SG005S in which the display mode changes (modification 135SG-7, FIGS. 40-124 to 40-130) is disclosed, but as a pachinko game machine of the present invention, these plural characteristic parts and modifications Any combination of two or more features or variations from the examples may be implemented.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as a gaming machine that performs a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine that performs a predetermined game is at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, a slot machine or a general game machine may be used as long as it performs

1 pachinko game machine 2 game board 3 game machine frame 4A first special symbol display device 4B second special symbol display device 5 image display device 11 main board 12 effect control board 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU
200 dispensing device 202 first guide passage forming portion 201 ball tank forming portion 203 first passage forming body 210 terminal board 220 cover bodies 271A to 271H holes 314, 324, 334 cover portion 340 ball stop members N1 to 6, 11 to 16 Screw member

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a starting region;
Light emitting means including a first light emitting means capable of emitting light and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means;
display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
an effect executing means capable of executing a specific display effect of displaying the specific display and a specific light emitting effect of causing the first light emitting means to emit light based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
a storage section capable of storing game media;
a payout unit capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming portion having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding the game media in the storage portion to the payout portion;
a screw drop limiting portion provided to cover the upper side of the guide passage forming portion;
with
A game can be played using the game medium paid out from the payout unit, and the specific light emission effect can be executed based on the game medium entering the start area,
The screw drop-limiting portion prevents the game medium falling on the screw drop-limiting portion from staying and the screw member dropped on the screw drop-limiting portion to drop into the guide passage forming portion. configured to be able to stay on the restriction part,
The second light emitting means emits light in a light emitting mode corresponding to the specific light emitting effect in the first light emitting means during a first period from the start of the specific light emitting effect to a predetermined timing and a second period different from the first period. is capable of emitting light through
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images